JP2018187203A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of causing a player to enjoy presentations by rotary decorative bodies and thereby suppressing deterioration in amusement.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine includes: a plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolving around an axis extending in the front and rear direction while spinning and having translucency; and a rear second decorative board 3240 disposed behind the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 and within a range of the revolution trajectory of the rotary decorative bodies 3210 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3241 capable of radiating light forward.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 136

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  The gaming machine includes a gaming area in which a game is played by a game medium being struck from the left side to the top by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the gaming area, A plurality of entrances (general winning entrances, starting entrances, variable winning entrances (variable starting entrances, large winning entrances, bonuses) that are allowed to receive game media within the area and grant a privilege according to the acceptance of the game media. Winning a prize opening), V winning a prize opening, etc.). Then, when the game medium is received at the entrance, a privilege (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, etc.) is given, so the game medium is sent to the entrance to the player. It is possible to entertain the game medium driving operation so as to be accepted.

  As this type of gaming machine, one having a rotating decorative body that is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and that is movable within a predetermined range has been proposed (for example, Patent Documents). 1). In the technique of Patent Document 1, the rotating decoration body moves from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area to the center side while rotating, thereby attracting the player's interest and making the player entertained.

  However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, since the range in which the rotating decoration body moves is narrow, some players become accustomed to the movement of the rotating decoration body at an early stage and cannot enjoy the effects of the rotating decoration body. There was a risk of lowering.

JP 2014-108257 A

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy the effects of the rotating decoration and suppress the decrease in interest.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A plurality of rotating decorative bodies having translucency that revolve around an axis extending forward and backward while rotating,
A plurality of light emitting means disposed behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies and within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative bodies and capable of irradiating light forward ". It is characterized by.

  Here, examples of the “rotating decoration” include “a flat plate”, “a rod”, “a column”, “a polygonal column”, and the like. In addition, the “rotating decorative body” includes “the one that rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction”, “the one that rotates about the axis extending in parallel with the surface formed by the revolution circumference”, “from the center of revolution” And the like that rotate around the extending radiation.

  In addition, examples of the “rotating decoration” include “things that rotate by revolving”, “things that revolve by rotating”, “things that have independent rotation and revolution”, and the like.

  Examples of the “light emitting means” include “LED (full color LED, single color LED, high brightness LED)”, “incandescent lamp”, “cold cathode tube”, “fluorescent lamp”, “neon lamp”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies having translucency that revolve around an axis extending forward and backward while rotating on the gaming machine, and the revolution of the rotating decorative body behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. And a plurality of light emitting means that are disposed within the locus and are capable of irradiating light forward.

  Thereby, since a some rotation decoration body revolves while rotating, it can give a strong impact with respect to a player and can attract a player's interest strongly. In addition, since a plurality of rotating ornaments revolve side by side on the circumference of the revolution while rotating, it is possible to give a lively impression to the player, entertain the player, It is possible to make the person think that there is something good, and to raise the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of light emitting means are provided in the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, the plurality of light emitting means are appropriately adjusted in accordance with the revolution of the rotating decorative body while revolving while rotating the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. When light is emitted, the light from the light emitting means is irradiated forward (player side) through the transparent decorative body having translucency, so that the bag can also appear to be provided with the light emitting means. In addition to making the plurality of rotating ornaments more conspicuous, it is possible to make the player enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the plurality of rotating ornaments, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of light emitting means are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in an annular shape, and when all the light emitting means are made to emit light, an annular light emitting effect is produced. Can be shown to the player. Further, when a plurality of light emitting means arranged in an annular shape are caused to emit light sequentially in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which light rotates on the circumference. Further, since the plurality of light emitting means are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By emitting light in order from the inside to the outside, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the ring of light spreads outside, or by emitting multiple light emitting means in order from the outside to the inside of the ring. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the ring is converged inward. As described above, since various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emission effect by the plurality of light emitting means as described above and the movable effect of revolving while rotating the rotating decorative body, an effect that could not be seen in conventional gaming machines can be played by the player. The player can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, can entertain the player, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device on which the effect image is displayed may face the center side of the revolution circle with respect to the revolution trajectory of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies. Thereby, the circumference | surroundings of an effect image can be decorated with a some rotation decoration body, and a player's interest can be attracted strongly to an effect image. Further, in this case, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies revolve around the effect image while rotating, it is possible to show the player a strong impact effect by displaying the effect image according to the movement of the rotating decorative object. In addition, the player can be more entertained, and various effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is movable behind the plurality of light emitting means, inside the revolution locus of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies, and within the range of the revolution locus in front view and between the center of the revolution circle and the revolution locus. A decorative body may be provided. Thereby, when the movable decorative body is located within the range of the revolution trajectory of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, the movable decorative body is made invisible from the player side by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies and the plurality of light emitting means. The movable decorative body can be seen from the player side by moving the movable decorative body to the center side of the revolution circle from the revolution trajectory of the plurality of rotational decorative bodies. The player can be surprised by being able to see the game, and the player can think that there is something good about the player, and the expectation for the game can be increased. Also, in this case, various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the effect of moving the movable decorative body and the effect of revolving while rotating a plurality of rotating decorative bodies. It can be made difficult to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, a translucent decorative body provided between a plurality of rotating decorative bodies and a plurality of light emitting means and having a predetermined decoration may be provided. Thereby, the light from a light emission means can be irradiated to a rotation decoration body through a decoration body, and there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned. In addition, since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitting means from the front due to the decorative body, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light emitting means provided separately from the rotational decorative body. It is possible to make it easy to make an illusion as a light emitting means is provided, and it is possible to further increase the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body that revolves while rotating, and to further enjoy the effect of the rotating decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  In addition, it is desirable that the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are flat and rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Thereby, since the plurality of flat rotating decoration bodies are rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the surface of the rotating decoration body faces forward, and the entire rotating decoration body is It becomes easy to see from the player side. And when these revolving decorations are rotated and revolved, it is possible to show the player how a plurality of revolving decorations rotate and to show the player a more lively feeling. The player can have a strong impact and can be greatly enjoyed, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies that rotate around the axis extending in the front-rear direction are flat, the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging a plurality of light emitting means and the like on the rear side, and it is possible to easily implement a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects. In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, other members can be provided in front of and behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. By doing so, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be stopped at the stop position on the revolution circumference, and the plurality of light emitting means are positioned behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies at the stop position. You may make it comprise with a light emission means group and the intermediate | middle light emission means group located between each decoration body light emission means groups. Accordingly, when the light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group among the plurality of light emitting means is made to emit light while the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are stopped at the stop position, the rotational decorative body can be illuminated and decorated. On the other hand, when the light emitting means of the intermediate light emitting means group among the plurality of light emitting means is made to emit light while the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are stopped at positions other than the stop position, the rotational decorative body can be decorated with light emission. Therefore, when revolving while rotating a plurality of rotating decorative bodies, when the revolving position of the rotating decorative body is near the stop position, the light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group, and the revolution position is a position between the stop positions. When the light emitting means of the intermediate light emitting means group emits light in the vicinity, the light emitting means that emits light moves together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body. It is possible to show the player the revolving while revolving, and to greatly delight the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, when the plurality of light emitting units are configured by the plurality of decorative body light emitting unit groups and the plurality of intermediate light emitting unit groups, the plurality of light emitting units are grouped into several groups. Therefore, by controlling each decorative body light emitting means group and each intermediate light emitting means group to emit light, the control circuit is compared with the case where the light emitting means are controlled to emit light one by one. The cost can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, when the plurality of light emitting means are divided into the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group, the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group have the revolution direction (circumference of the rotating decorative body). For example, when only the decorative body light emitting means group emits light in order in the circumferential direction at regular time intervals, and between the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group at the same time interval. In the case where the light emitting means group alternately emits light in the circumferential direction, the speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made different, the load on the control of the light emission effect can be reduced, and the light is different. A player can enjoy a light-emitting effect that rotates at a speed, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, when the plurality of light emitting units are configured by the plurality of decorative body light emitting unit groups and the plurality of intermediate light emitting unit groups, the rotating decorative body is provided in each of the plurality of decorative body light emitting unit groups. You may make it divide | segment into the revolving direction. Thereby, in each decorative body light emitting means group, the plurality of light emitting means constituting the decorative body light emitting means group are further divided in the revolution direction of the rotational decorative body. The light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group can be made to emit light in detail, so that only the light emitting means located behind the rotating decorative body can be made to emit light easily. If the body is equipped with light-emitting means, the player can have a strong illusion, and the movement of the light-decorated rotating decoration body can be more enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be made.

  In addition, when a plurality of light emitting means is composed of a plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups and a plurality of intermediate light emitting means groups, each decorative body light emitting means group is divided in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body When performing a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body, it is possible to make the movement of the light in the revolving direction finer, so that the light-emitting effect in which the light rotates more smoothly You can show them. In this case, as described above, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body becomes fine, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be further slowed down, and the player can enjoy various light emitting effects. It is difficult to get tired of, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are constituted by at least one special rotating decorative body having a special decoration and the remaining ordinary rotating decorative body having a decoration different from the special rotating decorative body. You may do it. As a result, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies have special rotating decorative bodies with special decoration, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are revolved while rotating, the special rotating decorative body is provided. However, depending on whether or not the player stops revolving at a position desired by the player (for example, a specific position), the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can entertain and enjoy the moving effects by using a plurality of rotating ornaments. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a shaft portion protruding in a columnar shape from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies to the rear of the light emitting means, a spur gear-like rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion, and the rotating body gear mesh with each other. An annular fixed gear provided concentrically with the center of revolution of the rotating decorative body, and an annular ring concentric with the fixed gear, provided rotatably around the center of the ring, You may make it further provide the drive ring which has the shaft hole inserted so that rotation is possible, and the drive motor which rotationally drives a drive ring. Thus, when the drive ring is rotated by the drive motor, the rotating decorative body provided at the front end of the shaft portion and the rear end of the shaft portion are provided together with the shaft portion inserted into the shaft hole of the drive ring. The rotating body gear moves (revolves) on the circumference having a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring to the shaft hole. Since the rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion meshes with the non-rotating fixed gear portion, when the rotating body gear revolves, the rotating body gear rolls on the fixed gear portion and rotates. The body gear rotates (spins) together with the shaft portion around the shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the shaft portion. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring by the drive motor, the plurality of rotary decorative bodies can be revolved while rotating, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, when the driving mechanism for the plurality of rotating decorative bodies is provided as described above, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be revolved while rotating with a single drive motor. Compared with the case where the revolution is driven by separate drive motors, the structure of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be simplified, the drive mechanism can be reduced in size, It is possible to reduce the control load related to the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. In addition, as described above, since the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be reduced, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decoration bodies. The body can be made larger to make it stand out from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies.

  Further, when the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decorative bodies as described above is provided, since the shaft portion protrudes rearward from the light emitting means, the rotating body gear provided at the rear end is from the light emitting means. Since the fixed gear portion and the drive ring are also behind the light emitting means, the rotating body gear, the fixed gear portion, the drive ring, etc. do not block the light irradiated forward from the light emitting means. It is possible to reliably decorate the rotating decorative body.

  Further, when the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decoration bodies is provided as described above, it is desirable that the fixed gear portion is provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the rotating decoration body. As a result, the fixed gear portion is provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the rotating decoration body, and the diameter of the fixed gear portion is smaller than the diameter of the revolution circle of the rotation decoration body. The rotation direction and the rotation direction of the shaft portion via the rotating body gear meshing with the fixed gear portion are the same direction, and the rotation direction and the revolution direction of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be the same direction. The same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, when the driving mechanism for the plurality of rotating decoration bodies as described above is provided, and the fixed gear portion is provided closer to the revolution center side than the revolution circle of the rotating decoration body, the plurality of rotation decoration bodies are provided. Since the shaft hole into which the shaft part for rotating the rotating decorative body is inserted is located on the revolution circumference, the drive ring is supposed to be provided outside the fixed gear part, A drive motor that rotates the drive ring can be provided outside the drive ring at a position that is substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the fixed gear portion. Accordingly, since the inside of the fixed gear portion (inside the revolution trajectory of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies) can be taken widely, other members facing the inside (for example, the display screen of the effect display device, the movable decoration body, etc.) It can be made easier to see, and the production effect by other members can be more easily exhibited. In addition, as described above, since the drive motor can be provided at substantially the same position as the front and rear direction of the fixed gear portion, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. Therefore, it becomes possible to widen a space for arranging a plurality of rotational decoration bodies relatively, and the rotational decoration bodies can be made larger and conspicuous from the player side. Can attract a lot of interest.

  Further, as described above, when a plurality of rotating decorative bodies are constituted by a special rotating decorative body and a normal rotating decorative body, one rotating decorative body is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position. It is desirable to include a stop position detection sensor that detects the position and a special position detection sensor that detects that one special rotating decorative body is positioned at a specific position. Thereby, when the normal rotating decorative body is located at the specific position among the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, only the stop position detection sensor detects, and when the special rotating decorative body is located at the specific position, the stop position is detected. Since the detection sensor and the special position detection sensor detect, either the normal rotation decoration body or the special rotation decoration body is located at the specific position depending on the combination of the detection by the stop position detection sensor and the detection by the special position detection sensor. Can be detected. Further, in this case, by using the stop position detection sensor and the special position detection sensor, it is possible to stop the revolution of the normal rotation decoration body and the special rotation decoration body that are revolving while rotating at a specific position. Therefore, it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decorative body stops revolving at a specific position, and the player can be excited and entertained, and the player's game is less interesting Can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the stop position detection sensor and the special position detection sensor are provided as described above, the detection piece detected by the stop position detection sensor and the special detection detected by the special position detection sensor are provided on the drive ring. It is desirable to have a piece. Thereby, a detection piece for detecting the normal rotation decoration body and the special rotation decoration body located at the specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body located at the specific position, Since it is provided on the drive ring, the detection piece and special detection piece do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece and special detection piece are provided on the rotating decorative body. A structure can be made simple and it can make it easy to embody the game machine which has the effect mentioned above.

  Further, when the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decorative bodies is provided, the fixed gear portion has a through-hole penetrating back and forth inside the revolving locus of the rotating decorative body. And a drive base, a drive motor, and a unit base provided behind the plurality of light emitting means. Accordingly, the drive ring, the drive motor, and the like can be supported by the unit base, and members (for example, the display screen of the effect display device, the movable decorative body, and the like) disposed behind the unit base can be passed through the through hole. Can be viewed from the player side. Therefore, the members facing the through hole of the unit base can be decorated with a plurality of rotating decorative bodies, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly applied to the member facing the through hole. It can be attracted, and the effect by the said member can be enjoyed and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
“It further includes a translucent decorative body that is provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies and the plurality of light emitting means and has a predetermined decoration”. And

  Here, as the “decorative body”, “having a decorative body through-hole penetrating back and forth inside the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body”, “divided into a plurality of directions in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body And the like "," divided into an inner side and an outer side with respect to the revolution circumference of the rotating ornament ", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the gaming machine is further provided with a translucent decorative body provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies and the plurality of light emitting means and having a predetermined decoration. Is.

  Thereby, the light from a light emission means can be irradiated to a rotation decoration body through a decoration body, and there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned. In addition, since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emitting means from the front due to the decorative body, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light emitting means provided separately from the rotational decorative body. It is possible to make it easy to make an illusion as a light emitting means is provided, and it is possible to further increase the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body that revolves while rotating, and to further enjoy the effect of the rotating decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  When the decorative body has a decorative body through hole penetrating back and forth inside the revolving locus of the rotating decorative body, the decorative body is arranged behind the decorative body through the decorative body through hole. Since members (for example, effect display devices, movable decorative bodies, etc.) can be visually recognized, when a plurality of rotating decorative bodies are rotated and revolved, they rotate around the rear members facing the decorative body through holes. It is possible to show the player an effect that the decorative body turns (revolves), can give a strong impact to the player, and strongly attract the player's interest to the members behind. Yes, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
“The plurality of rotating decorative bodies are
It is flat and rotates around an axis that extends back and forth.

  Here, examples of “spinning” of the rotating decorative body include “spinning in the same direction as the revolution direction”, “spinning in the direction opposite to the revolution direction”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are flat and rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, since the plurality of flat rotating decoration bodies are rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the surface of the rotating decoration body faces forward, and the entire rotating decoration body is It becomes easy to see from the player side. And when these revolving decorations are rotated and revolved, it is possible to show the player how a plurality of revolving decorations rotate and to show the player a more lively feeling. The player can have a strong impact and can be greatly enjoyed, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies have a flat plate shape, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be reduced, so that it is easy to secure a space for arranging a plurality of light emitting means and the like behind. Thus, it is possible to easily embody the gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects. In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, other members can be provided in front of and behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. By doing so, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The plurality of rotating decorative bodies are
Revolution stop is possible at the stop position on the revolution circle,
The plurality of light emitting means includes
A plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups positioned behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies at the stop position, and an intermediate light emitting means group positioned between the decorative body light emitting means groups. It is characterized by being "

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be stopped at the stop position on the revolution circumference, and the plurality of light emitting means are positioned behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies at the stop position. A plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups and an intermediate light emitting means group positioned between the decorative body light emitting means groups.

  Accordingly, when the light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group among the plurality of light emitting means is made to emit light while the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are stopped at the stop position, the rotational decorative body can be illuminated and decorated. On the other hand, when the light emitting means of the intermediate light emitting means group among the plurality of light emitting means is made to emit light while the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are stopped at positions other than the stop position, the rotational decorative body can be decorated with light emission. Therefore, when revolving while rotating a plurality of rotating decorative bodies, when the revolving position of the rotating decorative body is near the stop position, the light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group, and the revolution position is a position between the stop positions. When the light emitting means of the intermediate light emitting means group emits light in the vicinity, the light emitting means that emits light moves together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body. It is possible to show the player the revolving while revolving, and to greatly delight the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of light emitting means are constituted by a plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups and a plurality of intermediate light emitting means groups, and the plurality of light emitting means are grouped into several groups, By controlling each decorative body light emitting means group and intermediate light emitting means group to emit light, the control circuit can be simplified compared to the case where each light emitting means is controlled to emit light one by one. Can reduce costs.

  Further, the plurality of light emitting means is divided into a decorative body light emitting means group and an intermediate light emitting means group, and the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group are alternately arranged in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body. For example, when only the decorative body light emitting means group emits light in order in the circumferential direction at regular time intervals, the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group are set at the same time interval. In the case of alternately emitting light in the circumferential direction, the speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made different, the load on controlling the light emission effect can be reduced, and light emission in which the light rotates at different speeds. The production can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

Means 5: In the constitution of means 4,
“The plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups are:
It is divided | segmented in the revolution direction of the said rotation decoration body ", It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, each of the plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups is divided in the revolution direction of the rotational decorative body.

  Thereby, in each decorative body light emitting means group, the plurality of light emitting means constituting the decorative body light emitting means group are further divided in the revolution direction of the rotational decorative body. The light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group can be made to emit light in detail, so that only the light emitting means located behind the rotating decorative body can be made to emit light easily. If the body is equipped with light-emitting means, the player can have a strong illusion, and the movement of the light-decorated rotating decoration body can be more enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be made.

  Further, since each decorative body light emitting means group is divided in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body, when performing a light emitting effect in which the light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body, the light in the revolution direction is transmitted. Since the movement can be made finer, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light rotates more smoothly. In addition, as described above, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body becomes fine, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be further slowed down, and the player is bored with various light-emitting effects. It can be difficult to suppress the decline of interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“The plurality of rotating decorative bodies are
At least one special rotating decorative body with special decoration;
The special rotating decorative body is composed of the remaining ordinary rotating decorative body with different decorations ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are divided into at least one special rotating decorative body provided with a special decoration and the remaining ordinary rotating decorative bodies provided with a decoration different from the special rotating decorative body. And so on.

  As a result, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies have special rotating decorative bodies with special decoration, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are revolved while rotating, the special rotating decorative body is provided. However, depending on whether or not the player stops revolving at a position desired by the player (for example, a specific position), the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can entertain and enjoy the moving effects by using a plurality of rotating ornaments. Can be suppressed.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
“A shaft portion protruding in a columnar shape from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies to the rear of the light emitting means;
A spur gear-like rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion;
An annular fixed gear portion meshed with the rotating body gear and provided concentrically with the revolution center of the rotating decorative body;
A drive ring having a shaft hole concentrically with the fixed gear portion, provided rotatably about the center of the ring, and having a shaft hole into which the shaft portion is rotatably inserted;
And a drive motor that rotationally drives the drive ring ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is provided with a shaft portion projecting in a columnar shape from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies to the rear of the light emitting means, and a spur gear-like rotation provided at the rear end of the shaft portion. An annular fixed gear part that is meshed with the body gear and the rotating body gear and is concentrically provided with the revolution center of the rotating decorative body, and an annular ring that is concentric with the fixed gear part, and can be rotated around the center of the ring And a drive ring having a shaft hole in which a shaft portion is rotatably inserted, and a drive motor for rotating the drive ring.

  Thus, when the drive ring is rotated by the drive motor, the rotating decorative body provided at the front end of the shaft portion and the rear end of the shaft portion are provided together with the shaft portion inserted into the shaft hole of the drive ring. The rotating body gear moves (revolves) on the circumference having a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring to the shaft hole. Since the rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion meshes with the non-rotating fixed gear portion, when the rotating body gear revolves, the rotating body gear rolls on the fixed gear portion and rotates. The body gear rotates (spins) together with the shaft portion around the shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the shaft portion. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring by the drive motor, the plurality of rotary decorative bodies can be revolved while rotating, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be rotated and revolved by a single drive motor, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be rotated and rotated. The configuration of the drive mechanism applied to the rotating decorative body can be simplified, the driving mechanism can be reduced, and the control load related to the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be reduced, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decoration bodies. The body can be made larger to make it stand out from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies.

  Furthermore, since the shaft portion protrudes rearward from the light emitting means, the rotating body gear provided at the rear end is behind the light emitting means, and the fixed gear portion and the drive ring are naturally behind the light emitting means, The rotating body gear, the fixed gear portion, the drive ring, and the like do not block the light irradiated forward from the light emitting means, and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be surely decorated with light emission.

  In addition, when the fixed gear portion is the revolving center side of the revolving circle of the rotating decorative body, in other words, when the diameter of the fixed gear portion is smaller than the diameter of the revolving circle of the rotating decorative body, the rotation direction of the drive ring, The rotation direction of the shaft portion via the rotating body gear meshing with the fixed gear portion becomes the same direction, and the rotation direction and the revolution direction of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be the same direction.

  On the other hand, when the fixed gear portion is outside the revolution circle of the rotating ornament body, in other words, when the diameter (inner diameter) of the fixed gear portion is larger than the diameter of the revolution circle of the rotating ornament body, The rotation direction of the shaft portion through the rotating body gear meshing with the fixed gear portion becomes a different direction, and the rotation direction and the revolution direction of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be different from each other.

Means 8: In the constitution of means 7,
“The fixed gear is
It is characterized in that "it is provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the rotating decorative body".

  By the way, when the fixed gear portion is provided outside the revolution circle of the rotating decorative body, since the shaft hole is located on the revolution circle, the drive ring is more likely to revolve than the fixed gear portion. It will be provided on the center side. When a drive motor for rotating the drive ring is provided inside the drive ring, the inside of the drive ring (inside the revolution trajectory of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies) becomes narrow due to the presence of the drive motor. On the other hand, when the drive motor is provided outside the drive ring, there is a fixed gear portion on the outside of the drive ring. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the drive motor at different positions before and after the fixed gear portion. The front-rear direction of the drive mechanism applied to the rotating decorative body is thick.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the fixed gear portion is provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the rotating decorative body.

  As a result, the fixed gear portion is provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the rotating decoration body, and the diameter of the fixed gear portion is smaller than the diameter of the revolution circle of the rotation decoration body. The rotation direction and the rotation direction of the shaft portion via the rotating body gear meshing with the fixed gear portion are the same direction, and the rotation direction and the revolution direction of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be the same direction. The same effects as described above can be achieved.

  In addition, since the shaft hole into which the shaft portion for rotating the rotating decorative body is positioned is located on the revolution circumference of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, the drive ring is more likely than the fixed gear portion. The drive motor for rotating the drive ring can be provided outside the drive ring at a position where the fixed gear portion and the front-rear direction are substantially the same. Accordingly, since the inside of the fixed gear portion (inside the revolution trajectory of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies) can be taken widely, other members facing the inside (for example, the display screen of the effect display device, the movable decoration body, etc.) It can be made easier to see, and the production effect by other members can be more easily exhibited. In addition, as described above, since the drive motor can be provided at substantially the same position as the front and rear direction of the fixed gear portion, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies. Therefore, it becomes possible to widen a space for arranging a plurality of rotational decoration bodies relatively, and the rotational decoration bodies can be made larger and conspicuous from the player side. Can attract a lot of interest.

Means 9: In any one configuration from means 6 to means 8,
"A stop position detection sensor that detects that one of the rotating decorative bodies is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position;
It further includes a special position detection sensor that detects that one of the special rotating decorative bodies is located at the specific position.

  Here, as the “specific position”, “the position of the bottom dead center that is the lowest in the revolution circle of the rotating ornament”, “the position of the top dead center that is the uppermost in the revolution circle of the rotating ornament”, “ “Position to be leftmost in the revolution circle of the ornament”, “Position to be rightmost in the revolution circle of the rotating ornament”, “A privilege granting section that can grant a privilege to the player (for example, a general prize opening) , A position that is behind or in the vicinity of a starting opening, a variable starting opening, a big winning opening, an accessory winning opening, a V winning opening, a gate portion, a warp inlet, etc.).

  According to the structure of the means 9, in the gaming machine, a stop position detection sensor for detecting that one rotation decoration body is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position, and one special rotation decoration body. And a special position detection sensor for detecting that the sensor is located at a specific position.

  Thereby, when the normal rotating decorative body is located at the specific position among the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, only the stop position detection sensor detects, and when the special rotating decorative body is located at the specific position, the stop position is detected. Since the detection sensor and the special position detection sensor detect, either the normal rotation decoration body or the special rotation decoration body is located at the specific position depending on the combination of the detection by the stop position detection sensor and the detection by the special position detection sensor. Can be detected.

  In addition, by using the stop position detection sensor and the special position detection sensor, it is possible to stop the revolution of the normal rotation decoration body and the special rotation decoration body that are revolving while rotating at a specific position. It is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decoration body stops revolving at the position, and the player can be excited and entertained, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game is suppressed. be able to.

Means 10: In the constitution of means 9,
"The drive ring
A detection piece detected by the stop position detection sensor, a special detection piece detected by the special position detection sensor,
It is characterized by having "

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the drive ring has a detection piece detected by the stop position detection sensor and a special detection piece detected by the special position detection sensor.

  Thereby, a detection piece for detecting the normal rotation decoration body and the special rotation decoration body located at the specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body located at the specific position, Since it is provided on the drive ring, the detection piece and special detection piece do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece and special detection piece are provided on the rotating decorative body. A structure can be made simple and it can make it easy to embody the game machine which has the effect mentioned above.

Means 11: In any one configuration from means 7 to means 10,
“With a through-hole penetrating back and forth inside the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, and having the fixed gear portion, the drive ring and the drive motor are provided, It further comprises a unit base provided behind the light emitting means ”.

  According to the structure of the means 11, the gaming machine has a through-hole penetrating back and forth inside the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, and has a fixed gear portion, and a drive ring and a drive motor. And a unit base provided at the rear of the plurality of light emitting means.

  Accordingly, the drive ring, the drive motor, and the like can be supported by the unit base, and members (for example, the display screen of the effect display device, the movable decorative body, and the like) disposed behind the unit base can be passed through the through hole. Can be viewed from the player side. Therefore, the members facing the through hole of the unit base can be decorated with a plurality of rotating decorative bodies, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly applied to the member facing the through hole. It can be attracted, and the effect by the said member can be enjoyed and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when an effect display device capable of displaying an effect image is provided behind the unit base, the effect image can be viewed from the player side through the through hole of the unit base, and the effect image can be enjoyed. At the same time, it is possible to decorate the effect image with a plurality of rotating ornaments, and to attract the player's interest strongly to the effect image. Further, in this case, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies revolve around the effect image while rotating, it is possible to show the player a strong impact effect by displaying the effect image according to the movement of the rotating decorative object. In addition, the player can be more entertained, and various effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when a movable decorative body that can move between the outside and the inside of the through hole is provided behind the unit base, when the movable decorative body is located outside the through hole, the unit base and plural Since the movable decorative body can be made invisible from the player side by the rotating decorative body or the like, when the movable decorative body is moved to the inside of the through hole, the movable decorative body becomes visible and surprises the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by thinking that there is something good for the player. Also, in this case, various effects can be shown to the player by appropriately combining the effect of moving the movable decorative body and the effect of revolving while rotating a plurality of rotating decorative bodies. It can be made difficult to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 12: In the gaming machine,
“Transparent flat plate composed of at least one special rotating decorative body with special decoration and the remaining ordinary rotating decorative body with decoration different from the special rotating decorative body A plurality of rotating decorative bodies that revolve around the axis extending forward and backward while rotating around the axis extending forward and backward,
A plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups disposed within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, and positioned behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies that have stopped revolving at a stop position on the revolution circumference; And a plurality of light emitting means configured to irradiate light toward the front, the intermediate light emitting means group located between the decorative body light emitting means groups,
A decorative body through-hole is provided between the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, and has a decorative body through-hole penetrating back and forth inside the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body. A decorative body having translucency in which the decoration is formed;
A shaft portion protruding in a columnar shape from the center of rotation of each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies to the rear of the light emitting means;
A spur gear-like rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion;
A through hole penetrating back and forth in the same size as the decorative body through hole, and a circle meshed with the rotating body gear and concentric with the revolution center of the rotating decorative body and provided closer to the revolution center side than the revolution circle An annular fixed gear portion, and a unit base provided behind the plurality of light emitting means,
A stop position detection sensor that is provided on the unit base and detects that one of the rotating decorative bodies is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position;
A special position detection sensor that is provided on the unit base and detects that the one special rotating decorative body is located at the specific position;
The fixed gear portion having a special detection piece detected by the special position detection sensor, a detection piece detected by the stop position detection sensor, and a shaft hole into which the shaft portion is rotatably inserted. And a drive ring provided on the unit base so as to be rotatable about the center of the ring,
It is provided on the unit base outside the drive ring and includes a drive motor that rotationally drives the drive ring.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is composed of at least one special rotating decorative body having a special decoration and the remaining ordinary rotating decorative body having a decoration different from the special rotating decorative body. It is a flat plate with translucency, and is arranged within the range of the revolving trajectory of the rotating decoration body and a plurality of rotating decoration bodies that revolve around the axis extending forward and backward while rotating around the axis extending forward and backward. And a plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups positioned behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies that have stopped revolving at the stop position on the revolution circumference, and are positioned between the decorative body light emitting means groups. A plurality of light emitting means that can irradiate light forward, and provided between the plurality of light emitting means and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies, and the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative bodies. That penetrates back and forth inside A translucent decorative body having a body through-hole and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon, and a shaft protruding in a columnar shape rearward from the light emitting means from the rotation center of each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies , A spur gear-like rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion, a through hole penetrating back and forth in the same size as the decorative body through hole, and a rotating decorative body meshing with the rotating body gear A unit base that is concentric with the center of revolution and provided on the side of the center of revolution with respect to the center of revolution, and a unit base provided behind the plurality of light emitting means, and a unit base A stop position detection sensor that detects that one rotating decorative body is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position, and one special rotation provided on the unit base. Detects that the decoration is located at a specific position It has a special position detection sensor, a special detection piece detected by the special position detection sensor, a detection piece detected by the stop position detection sensor, and a shaft hole in which the shaft portion is rotatably inserted, and is fixed An annular ring concentric with the gear part, which is provided on the unit base so as to be rotatable around the center of the annular ring, and provided on the unit base outside the driving ring to drive the driving ring to rotate. A drive motor.

  Thus, at the front of the decorative body having a decorative body through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a normal state, at least the special rotational decorative body to which special decoration is applied, and the special rotational decorative body A plurality of rotating decorative bodies having translucency, which are composed of the remaining ordinary rotating decorative bodies with different decorations, extended back and forth so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole of the decorative body While being arranged on the revolution circumference centering on an axis, the member provided in the back is facing the decorative body through-hole. In this state, when the drive ring is rotated by the drive motor, the shaft part extending rearward from each rotary decorative body is inserted into the shaft hole of the drive ring. The rotating body gear provided at the rear end moves (revolves) on the circumference (revolving circumference) having the radius from the rotation center of the drive ring to the shaft hole as a radius. At this time, the rotating body gear provided at the rear end of the shaft portion meshes with the fixed gear portion provided on the revolving center side of the revolving circle in the unit base. Then, the rotating body gear rolls around the fixed gear portion and rotates in the same direction as the revolution direction of the rotating body gear, and the rotating body gear extends along with the shaft portion and the rotating decoration body in the front and rear of the shaft portion. It will rotate (spin) around the axis. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring by the drive motor, multiple rotating decorative bodies revolve in the same direction while rotating, so that it can have a strong impact on the player and attract the player's attention strongly. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies that revolve around the axis extending in the front-rear direction are flat, the surface of the rotating decorative body faces forward, and the entire rotating decorative body is visible from the player side. As it becomes easy, when these rotating decorative bodies revolve while rotating, it is possible to show the player how the rotating decorative bodies rotate with each other, and to show the player a lively feeling production. At the same time, the player can have a strong impact and can be greatly enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Also, behind the rotating ornaments and ornaments, the rotating ornaments are divided in the revolving direction to the rear of the rotating ornaments that have stopped revolving at the stop position on the revolution circumference within the revolution trajectory of the rotating ornaments. A plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups, and an intermediate light emitting means group positioned between each of the decorative body light emitting means groups. When the light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group emits light while the decorative body is at the stop position, the rotational decorative body can be light-decorated. When the light emitting means of the means group is caused to emit light, the rotating decorative body can be decorated with light emission. Therefore, when a plurality of rotating decorative bodies are revolving while rotating, if the light emitting means of the decorative body light emitting means group and the light emitting means of the intermediate light emitting means group emit light appropriately according to the revolution of the rotating decorative body, light is emitted. Since the light emitting means moving together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body, the light from the light emitting means is irradiated forward (player side) through the decorative body and the rotating decorative body having translucency. Thus, the rotating decorative body can be decorated with light emission so that the light emitting means is provided on the rotating decorative body, and the player can show the player the effect of revolving while rotating the rotating decorative bodies. Thus, it is possible to greatly delight the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  At this time, since the plurality of light emitting means constituting the decorative body light emitting means group are divided in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body, the light emission of the decorative body light emitting means group is finely adapted to the revolution of the rotating decorative body. Since the means can be made to emit light, only the light emitting means located behind the rotating decorative body can be easily made to emit light, and if the rotating decorative body that rotates and revolves is provided with the light emitting means, A strong illusion can be given to the player, and the movement of the rotating decorative body decorated with light emission can be more enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of light emitting means composed of a decoration light emitting means group and an intermediate light emitting means group are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in an annular shape. If all the light emitting means are made to emit light, an annular light emitting effect can be shown to the player. Further, the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body, so that the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. If the lights are emitted in turn, the player can be shown a light emitting decoration in which the light rotates on the circumference. Further, since the plurality of light emitting means are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By emitting light in order from the inside to the outside, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the ring of light spreads outside, or by emitting multiple light emitting means in order from the outside to the inside of the ring. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the ring is converged inward. As described above, since various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when performing a light emitting effect in which light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body, each decorative body light emitting means group is divided in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body, so that the light moves in the revolution direction. Can be made finer, so that the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. In addition, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be further slowed down, making it difficult for the player to get bored with various light-emitting effects. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emission effect by the plurality of light emitting means as described above and the movable effect of revolving while rotating the rotating decorative body, an effect that could not be seen in conventional gaming machines can be played by the player. The player can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, can entertain the player, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of light emitting means are grouped into a plurality of decorative body light emitting means groups and a plurality of intermediate light emitting means groups, each decorative body light emitting means group and intermediate light emitting means group are controlled to emit light. Thus, the control circuit can be simplified and the cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the plurality of light emitting means are controlled to emit light one by one.

  Furthermore, since the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body, for example, only the decorative body light emitting means group is circumferentially arranged at a constant time interval. The speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction can be different between the case where the light is emitted sequentially and the case where the decorative body light emitting means group and the intermediate light emitting means group are alternately emitted in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. In addition to reducing the load on the control of the light emission effect, the player can enjoy the light emission effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a decorative body having translucency is provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies and the plurality of light emitting means, it is difficult for the light emitting means to be visually recognized from the front by the decorative body. Since it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the light emitting means provided separately from the rotating decorative body, it is possible to make it easy to make an illusion as if the rotating decorative body is provided with the light emitting means, and the object rotates while rotating. The impact of the rotating decorative body due to the light emitting decoration can be further increased, the effect of the rotating decorative body can be more enjoyed, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies have special rotating decorative bodies with special decoration, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are revolved while rotating, the special rotating decorative body is Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped at a specific position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can enjoy a movable effect by a plurality of rotating ornaments and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, a stop position detection sensor for detecting that one rotating decorative body is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stopping position, and that one special rotating decorative body is located at the specific position. A special position detection sensor to detect, when a normal rotation decoration body is located at a specific position among a plurality of rotation decoration bodies, only the stop position detection sensor detects and the special rotation decoration body is specified. Since the stop position detection sensor and the special position detection sensor detect when they are in the position, a normal rotating decorative body is placed at a specific position by a combination of detection by the stop position detection sensor and detection by the special position detection sensor. Alternatively, it is possible to detect which of the special rotating decorative bodies is located. Accordingly, when one of a plurality of rotating ornaments is stopped at a specific position, a normal rotating ornament and a special rotating ornament that are revolving while rotating by using a stop position detection sensor and a special position detection sensor. Since any of the bodies can be revolved and stopped at a specific position, it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decorative body will stop revolving at the specific position. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, a detection piece for detecting a normal rotation decoration body and a special rotation decoration body located at a specific position and a special detection piece for detecting a special rotation decoration body located at a specific position are driven. Because it is provided on the ring, the detection piece and special detection piece do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece and special detection piece are provided on the rotating decorative body. This makes it possible to easily implement a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be rotated and revolved by a single drive motor, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be rotated and rotated. The configuration of the drive mechanism applied to the rotating decorative body can be simplified, the driving mechanism can be reduced, and the control load related to the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotating decoration bodies can be reduced, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decoration bodies. The body can be made larger to make it stand out from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies.

  Furthermore, since the shaft portion protrudes rearward from the light emitting means, the rotating body gear provided at the rear end is behind the light emitting means, and the fixed gear portion and the drive ring are naturally behind the light emitting means, The rotating body gear, the fixed gear portion, the drive ring, and the like do not block the light irradiated forward from the light emitting means, and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be surely decorated with light emission.

  In addition, a drive motor that rotates the drive ring is provided on the outside of the drive ring, and the inside of the fixed gear portion (inside of the decorative body through hole in the decorative body) can be taken widely, so other members facing the inside (For example, the display screen of the effect display device, the movable decorative body, etc.) can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect by other members can be more easily exhibited.

  In addition, since the drive ring is provided outside the fixed gear portion and the drive motor is provided outside the drive ring, the drive motor can be provided at substantially the same position as the position in the front-rear direction of the drive ring. An increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the rotating decorative body can be suppressed. Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies are formed in a flat plate shape, and the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be reduced. From these things, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the space for arranging a plurality of rotational decorations is relatively widened, so that the rotational decorations can be made larger from the player side. It is possible to make it stand out, and it is possible to attract a player's interest strongly to a plurality of rotating decoration bodies, and it is possible to provide other members in front of and behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies. By performing the production using the members, it is possible to show the player a variety of productions, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 12,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which gaming media are driven by the player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media, and games to the receiving hall This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  It should be noted that it is desirable that an effect in which a plurality of rotating decoration bodies and a plurality of light emitting means are appropriately combined is executed when a game medium that has been driven into the game area is received at the reception port. As a result, when the game medium is received at the receiving port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and in addition, an effect that appropriately combines a plurality of rotating decoration bodies and a plurality of light emitting means is executed. By making it entertained, it is possible to easily continue the game medium aimed at the entrance, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, an effect in which a plurality of rotating decoration bodies and a plurality of light emitting means are appropriately combined may be executed. As a result, a plurality of rotating ornaments can move or emit light, so that the player can have a strong impact and entertain due to the above-described effects, so that a special lottery is drawn for the player. The lottery result can be thought of as an advantageous game state where the player has an advantage (for example, a “hit”), which increases the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state and suppresses a decrease in interest Can be made. In addition, as described above, since the player can show the player with a higher production effect by moving or emitting light, a lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player. It can be suitably used for the production (for example, reach production) for the purpose, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 14: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 12,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the structure of the means 14, the game machine is each provided with a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by the player operating after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, the effect of appropriately combining a plurality of rotating ornaments and a plurality of light emitting means is when the combination of symbols that have stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning winning symbols ( As one of the effects presented to the player at the time of so-called reach), an effect in which a plurality of rotating ornaments and a plurality of light emitting means are appropriately combined may be executed. As a result, the plurality of rotating ornaments can move or emit light, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, an effect that appropriately combines a plurality of rotating decorative bodies and a plurality of light emitting means may be executed, whereby the plurality of rotating decorative bodies can be moved. Since the player can have a strong impact by flashing or emitting light, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when stopped by a combination of specific symbols occurs (for example, “BB”) It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to generation | occurrence | production of an advantageous game state can be raised, and the fall of interest can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies can move or emit light, it is possible to show the player an effect with a higher effect, so that the player can be informed of the lottery internal lottery. It can be used suitably for the production of the game, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 15: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 12,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 15, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, the effect of appropriately combining a plurality of rotating ornaments and a plurality of light emitting means is when the combination of symbols that have stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning winning symbols ( As one of the effects presented to the player at the time of so-called reach), a plurality of rotating ornaments may be moved or lit, and when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, The rotating decorative body may be moved or light-emitted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy an effect by a rotating decoration body and suppress a decrease in interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right back. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel or the like is transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming board showing the gaming panel in an opaque state and showing a gaming nail in which a gaming unit circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the gaming panel and an obstacle nail. FIG. 118 is an enlarged front view of a distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 117. FIG. 118 is an enlarged front view of an attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG. 117. (A) is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from FIG. 118 etc., (b) is further embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from (a). FIG. (A) is the principal part enlarged view which shows the embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center character further different from FIG. 120, (b) is the principal part expansion which shows the embodiment of the distribution channel group of the further center character. FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center role further different from FIG.120 and FIG.121. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the back. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the light-guide plate in a back 1st production unit, and a decoration board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back 2nd stage production unit mainly for every structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back 2nd production unit mainly for every structure and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism in a back 2nd stage production unit. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the some rotation decoration body in a back 2nd stage production unit. (E)-(g) is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the several rotation decoration body in the back 2nd stage production unit continued from FIG. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED in a back 2nd stage unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back third presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back third presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism and decoration board | substrate in a back third stage production unit in the state which moved the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit is revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. It is a front view which expands and shows the lower part of a game board in the state which moved the special rotation decoration body in the back 2nd stage unit to the specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the upper vertical ring decoration body, the lower vertical ring decoration body, the left horizontal ring decoration body, and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third stage production unit to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back third effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the shadow effect performed during the light emission effect in a back unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state where the game board faces from the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 Control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy driving the handle 182.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the back first effect unit 3100, the back A player can be entertained by performing a movable effect or a light-emitting effect by the second effect unit 3200, the back third effect unit 3300, or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 151) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the unauthorized string is manipulated to cause the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are partly projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In addition, a step with the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 being higher can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a. Accordingly, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Can be used as a finger hook when operating the production operation unit 301 described later. Moreover, the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward due to the steps between the upper left bulging portion 252a and the upper right flaring portion 252a.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flail 111 meanders in a plan view, and an illegal tool is seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around the vertically extending axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view, and the front wall and the rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  In addition, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed to be higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 on the downstream side of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lower as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The left step 501n and the right step 501o are inclined such that the rear right corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball grind) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the direction of the pressure applied to the game ball B can be prevented, so that the game balls B can be prevented from being pressed against each other, and the game ball B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to prevent falling from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 from the overflow surface portion 501m is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the gaming board as viewed from the right rear. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left rear. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004, and a prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game is performed to entertain the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 117, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 97, FIG. 151, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 115 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to a command from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 that drives the decorative board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 that is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the start that becomes the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. From an attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right of the front unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Is a frame having a gate portion 2003 that is attached slightly above the center of the game area 5a. And includes the center role object 2500, the.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in itself, and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 are provided. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism acting illegally.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 151). See).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. The rear third stage production unit 3300 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second stage production unit 3200 and the front opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed in front of the back second stage production unit 3200 The back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 and releases it downward, and the game received in the general winning port 2001, the second start port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right sphere discharge unit 3040 for receiving the sphere B and releasing it downward.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (a) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 (b) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. Yes.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is substantially entirely formed transparent, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating front and rear and a short long hole, and at an upper edge and a lower edge, respectively. A plurality of engaging step portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The balls B are wide enough to be arranged, and the upper and right sides are narrow enough that a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) that is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step is about the same size as the game area 5a. A through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1012 and the notch are penetrated to pass through the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Although not shown in the figure, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion and is disposed outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, respectively. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. A pair of engagement pieces that respectively engage with the two engagement step portions on the lower side of the. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left side by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward after engaging the engaging step of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally forward. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state in which the panel plate 1110 is accommodated in the holding step portion by elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion that is present with the engaging claw. At this time, the projecting pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151) for controlling game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second start port sensor 2402, a big winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning port sensor. 2401, a general winning a prize opening sensor 3001, and a magnetic sensor 2470.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail, but the two shins display a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 has a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 151) for controlling the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 projecting outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119 and the like. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from behind. FIG. 117 is a front view of the gaming board showing the gaming panel in an opaque state and the front unit in parallel with the surface of the gaming panel, showing a gaming area in which gaming balls circulate and obstacle nails. 118 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 117, and FIG. 119 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction above the general winning award port 2001 on the right side. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a position higher than the first start port 2002 below the right general winning port 2001. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second start opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first start opening 2002.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning port 2001, A side unit 2200 which is attached to the left side of the mouth unit 2100 so as to follow the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 and has two general winning ports 2001, and a start mouth unit which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a as seen from the front side. An attacker unit 2400 that is attached to the right side of the front view 2100 and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005, and above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Thus, a frame-shaped center attached to the center of the game area 5a slightly above the front view and having a gate portion 2003 is provided. The Tar won game 2500, is equipped with a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the gaming area 5a near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction and immediately above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a width that can accept only one game ball B and is always open upward, and receives only one game ball B at the lower left of the first start port 2002. And a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a possible width. The start port unit 2100 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 114 and the like).

  The start unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 117 and the like) that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 as a panel. A guide path 2102 (see FIG. 116) for discharging to the lower side (on the substrate holder 1200) after being guided to the rear of the plate 1110 is provided.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start port 2002 is a center described later. It is located immediately below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  In the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first start port 2002 is located immediately below the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the central discharge portion of the stage 2503 The game ball B released from 2503a is configured to be received at the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times, and a first shelf 2201 that is inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper left of the two general winning ports 2001. , And a second shelf 2202 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered at the upper part of the two general winning ports 2001. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, two general winning ports 2001 are provided at a height position between the first starting port 2002 and the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100. The two general winning ports 2001 are provided facing each other so as to be arranged side by side. The left general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens toward the right.

  In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the right. The first shelf 2201 is inclined so that an extension line on the upper surface passes between the first start port 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf 2202 is inclined such that the extension line on the upper surface passes through the portion where the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100 is opened.

  The entire side unit 2200 is transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 114 and the like). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 are projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. . The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are detected by a general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 151).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The entire attacker unit 2400 is formed to be transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 114 and the like). The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 among the four general winning ports 2001 (see FIG. 119 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the upper right corner, and the second start opening 2004 can be opened upward in the lower left of the general winning opening 2001. Can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second start opening 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and the big winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large And a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 151 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004, and opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate part 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 119 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 includes an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422 through which a game ball B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged on the upper right, and an attacker left passage. A second starting port guide shelf 2423 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left from the position immediately below 2421, and a second starting port guide shelf 2423 that has a second starting port 2004 open in the middle; A large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower leftward from a position spaced from the left end of the start opening guiding shelf 2423 to the left, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened in the middle. I have.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423, and a lower position than the prize winning port 2005 from the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423. From the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker extending to the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 so as to become lower leftward, and between the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. An intermediate passage 2427 that extends downward from the big prize opening 2005 and communicates with the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001, partitions the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and provides a communication port 2425 between the lower end and the second start opening guide shelf 2423. A partition portion 2428 to be formed, and an inclined portion 2429 which is inclined so as to be positioned leftward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428 upward.

  A second start port door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start port 2004 opened in the second start port guide shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction and has a plate-like shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is formed, and the left end side is provided to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second starting port door 2411 is configured such that the right end side is positioned above the horizontal and slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting port 2004. The second start port 2004 can be closed by disabling acceptance of B. In a state where the second start port 2004 is closed, the second start port door 2411 guides the game ball B that has circulated through the second start port guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left side. be able to.

  The second starting port door 2411 is in a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed in a counterclockwise direction so that the right end side moves upward with the left end side as the center, The second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened) by allowing the game ball B to be received in the second starting port 2004. When the second starter door 2411 rises to the right end side and opens the second starter 2004, the second starter door 2411 rises from the second starter guide shelf 2423. Thus, the path of the game ball B rolling on the second start port guide shelf 2423 can be inhibited, and the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (when energizing). Let

  The grand prize opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the big prize opening 2005 opened in the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The award winning opening 2005 opened upward can be opened and closed by moving forward and backward. The grand prize opening door 2413 can close the grand prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and in the state where the big prize opening 2005 is closed, the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side). The played game ball B can be guided to the left. Also, the special winning opening door 2413 is moved back by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005, and circulates through the second start opening guiding shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 of the center object 2500. The game ball B can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below the gate portion 2003 (below the gate portion 2003) on the downstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later. The second starting port 2004 is positioned at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is also a big winning port. 2005 is located below the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Moreover, in the state attached to the panel board 1110, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the lower end and the upper end (general winning port 2001) of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500.

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning port 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the game ball B is released from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted into the general winning port 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (distribution passage group 2520) of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general winning port 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and the game balls flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 B will enter either of them.

  When the game ball B supplied through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and above the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the general winning port 2001, it is detected by the general winning port sensor 2401. In the rear side of the game panel 1100, the game panel 1100 is discharged downward (on the board holder 1200). If the game ball B enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being received in the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, and According to the inclination, it flows to the second start port 2004 side (left side). In a state where the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411, the second start port 2004 flows to the left on the second start port door 2411 and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second start port guide shelf 2423. . When the game ball B passes through the second start port guide shelf 2423, if the second start port 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted into the second start port 2004 with a very high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start opening 2004, it is discharged to the left big winning opening 2005 side through the second start opening guide shelf 2423.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released from the second starting port guide shelf 2423 to the left side is the prize winning port 2005 side, Or it will flow down to either of the intermediate passage 2427 side. When the prize winning opening 2005 is closed by the prize winning entrance door 2413 when it flows down to the prize winning entrance 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the prize winning entrance door 2413 and from the left end of the prize winning entrance guide shelf 2424. Released to the left. When the big prize opening door 2413 closing the big prize opening 2005 is retreated and the big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B flowing down from the second start opening guide shelf 2423 to the big prize opening 2005 side, Accepted at Grand Prize Winner 2005. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second start-port guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the big prize guide guide shelf 2424 pass through the out port 1008 to the rear side of the game panel 1100. Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200).

  On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the general winning opening 2001, and is placed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001. When entering the attacker right passage 2422, it comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005 and rebounds to the left. In the present embodiment, since the second start port guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second start port guide shelf 2423 coincides with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, it enters the attacker right passage 2422. Then, the game ball B bounced off at the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 falls (circulates) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability.

  When the game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2422 and contacts the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 that forms the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429. Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located on the right side with respect to the lower end, the game ball B that is in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected toward the lower right side passage 2426 of the attacker, The attacker enters the lower right passage 2426. Further, when the game ball B abutting against the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces downward from the communication port 2425, the game ball B enters the attacker lower right passage 2426.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker lower right passage 2426 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received at the second start port 2004 and the big winning port 2005.

  Also, the attacker unit 2400 includes a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second start port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is activated by the lighting / flashing of the LED, the emission color, and the like. Displays the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 To do.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 151). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraud using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially transparently, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110) is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2503, a portion (central discharge portion 2503a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side discharge portion 2503b) on both the left and right sides are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and the game ball | bowl B can be discharge | released into the game area | region 5a from those parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (central discharge portion 2503 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction and on the right side of the outer peripheral surface on the right side. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough and is provided with a gate sensor 2505 that detects the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with a space through which only one game ball B can pass between the gate portion 2003 and the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 forms a part of the upper outer peripheral surface, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right from a position on the left side than the center in the left-right direction. , And a distribution passage group 2520 including a plurality of passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. The flow passage group 2520 extends vertically from the vicinity of the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. A second distribution passage 2522. The first distribution passage 2521 extends in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the game area 5a from the inlet side at the upper end, the lower end is bent in a crank shape to the left, and the outlet is downward. It is open toward. The exit at the lower end of the first distribution passage 2521 is located slightly to the right with respect to the top of the gate portion 2003.

  The second flow passage 2522 has an upper end inlet that is open to the left with respect to the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 and is bent in a crank shape to the right near the upper end. Adjacent to the circulation passage 2521, it extends downward in a circular arc shape, bends in a crank shape to the left in the vicinity of the lower end, then bends in a crank shape to the right, and the outlet is adjacent to the outlet of the first circulation passage 2521. It is open toward. As a result, the second circulation passage 2522 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game ball B more than the first circulation passage 2521. The first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2523 at intervals in the distribution direction of the game balls B, and the game balls B abut on the protrusions 2523. Therefore, the distribution speed can be suppressed.

  The center accessory 2500 is located on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) of the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. An upstream space 2511 in which the game ball B can be circulated is formed. Further, in the assembled state in the game board 5, the upper end entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located directly below the stop portion 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is connected to the right rail 1005 (game). It extends along the periphery of the region 5a. Further, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a).

[5-8e. The flow of game balls through the distribution channel group of the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 and the like. In the assembled state in the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate part 2003, and between the gate part 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. Has been planted. The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game balls B that have circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 are positioned on the right side of the gate portion 2003 (the gate portion 2003 and the right rail 1005). ), And is adjusted to circulate with high probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game balls B that have circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. It has been adjusted. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 has a high probability that the game ball B that has circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 is next to the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to circulate on the left side of 2003.

  On the other hand, in the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate unit 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the gate unit 2003 has a high probability of the attacker unit 2400. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 are highly likely to be a game ball B that circulates on the gate portion 2003 or the left side of the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to enter the left attacker left passage 2421 of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 with the next highest probability of the attacker left passage 2421.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 The game ball B flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). ), The game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first distribution passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first circulation passage 2521 has a high probability to the right of the gate portion 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the downstream end of the first circulation passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Pass through. Then, the game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 circulates through either the second start port guide shelf 2423 or the attacker right lower passage 2426.

  As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate part 2003 so much, so that the lottery of the result of the normal lottery performed by passing through the gate part 2003 of the game ball B is not performed much, There is a low possibility that the normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 circulates through the second start-out guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second start-up port 2004 is often closed. Since the mouth 2004 is not so much received, there are few opportunities to receive benefits such as lottery of the second special lottery result and payout of the game ball B by accepting the game ball B at the second start opening 2004. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the privilege given to the player is relatively small.

  In addition, although the case where it hit on the right was demonstrated above, the game ball B thrown in by the strength which jumps over the entrance of the 2nd distribution passage 2522 opened near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510, It will enter into the 1st distribution passage 2521, and will become the result similar to the above.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003. A lottery of the normal lottery result is performed by passing through the gate part 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N installed. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and from the attacker left passage 2421 The second start port guide shelf 2423 is distributed.

  At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, if the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 has a predetermined pattern. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the second distribution passage 2522, the privilege given to the player is relatively high (large).

  For this reason, since the player is more likely to receive a privilege in the second distribution passage 2522, the player has a driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511, and the game The driving strength of the gaming ball B will be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522. A change can be given to the driving operation, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and allows the player to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In the case where the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is a “big hit” that generates an advantageous gaming state, etc. The big prize opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game balls B with a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when the game balls B are accepted into the big prize opening 2005, many game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous game state (“big hit game state”), if the player is required to adjust the strength of the game ball B, the player may feel impatient and frustrated. There is a risk of reducing interest in However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit right and circulates through the first distribution passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422 circulate, and then communicate with the step portion 1005 a of the right rail 1005. The game ball B can be distributed to the big prize opening guidance shelf 2424 side (large prize opening 2005 side) by bouncing back toward the opening 2425 and falling to the second start opening guidance shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425. Therefore, the game ball B can be received into the big prize opening 2005 by an easy driving operation without adjusting the driving operation delicately, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened according to the game state, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center character]
Subsequently, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG. 120 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory different from FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment. FIG. 121 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center character that is further different from that in FIG. 120, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 122 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory that is further different from those in FIGS. 120 and 121. 120 and 121, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 120 (a), compared to FIG. 118, the upper end inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 is separated from the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 to the left. It is a thing. This distribution passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 120 (b), the angle of the hitting portion 1006 is such that the hitting ball 1006 in the front component member 1000 can easily rebound to the entrance side of the second circulation passage 2522. And the portion between the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 and the inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered. It has been made. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second circulation passage 2522 side, so the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 becomes wider. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 121 (a), in the distribution passage group 2520 of FIGS. 118 and 120, the respective inlets of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream side of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 is extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are directed leftward in a state of being vertically aligned. It is made to open.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5 a) constitutes a part of the first circulation passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is a part of the second circulation passage 2522. Part. In this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is the first circulation from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It becomes the length to each entrance of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2511 shown in FIG. 118 and FIG.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength that comes into contact with the narrower portion on the left side than the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with the driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared to the embodiment of FIG. 118 and FIG. The adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B is narrowed. In addition, a game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 divides the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), there is a possibility of deviating from the upstream space portion 2511 depending on the momentum and angle of the bounced game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2511, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2511 and does not enter any of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center object 2500 may be distributed. For this reason, since the difficulty level for the game ball B driving operation is increased, the player's willingness to drive the game ball B can be increased, and the player can insert game media. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 121 (b), in the embodiment of FIG. 121 (a), a branch portion 2524 that communicates with the second circulation passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first circulation passage 2521. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion that is bent downward from the right end of a portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) that extends to the left and right in the second circulation passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is struck with the strength to enter the first distribution passage 2521, the game sphere B is second in the branch portion 2524 depending on the struck strength (if the stake strength is weak). Since branching to the circulation passage 2522 side, the difficulty of circulation of the game ball B with respect to the second circulation passage 2522 can be made lower than that in the embodiment of FIG. 121 (a).

  In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B to be weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first distribution passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion bent downward in the second circulation passage 2522, the game ball B that has entered the second circulation passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not jump upward (branch portion 2524 side), and does not enter the first distribution passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522 by one-way.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the inlet of the first distribution passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first distribution passage 2521, the first distribution passage 2521 side in the portion of the branch portion 2524 Or, since it branches to either side of the second distribution passage 2522, the player can be throbbing or throbbing depending on whether the game ball B branches to which side in the branching portion 2524, the first circulation It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 even though the player has hit the game ball B aiming at the second distribution passage 2522. Since the branch portion 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521 may branch to the second distribution passage 2522 side, whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side determines whether or not the player It can be thrilled and entertained by the player, and when the branching portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side, a player's driving operation mistake is covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is opened. The game ball B will be distributed, and it can be made to the feeling obtained with respect to a player, and the fall of the interest with respect to a player's game can be suppressed.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 122, the second distribution passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the inlet of the second flow passage 2522 opens upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Accordingly, all of the game balls B that have been driven into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 circulate through the first circulation passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the player, if the game ball B distributes through the bypass portion 2525 to the player, it can be thought that there is something good after that. Allow the player to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and to entertain the game ball B to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126 and the like. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back after being disassembled as per the main structure. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 151). See).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. The rear third stage production unit 3300 mounted in the back box 3010 behind the back second stage production unit 3200 and the front opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed in front of the back second stage production unit 3200 The back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 and releases it downward, and the game received in the general winning port 2001, the second start port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. A back right sphere discharge unit 3040 for receiving the sphere B and releasing it downward.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by cutting from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction (see FIGS. 125 and 126, etc.).

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

  Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion port 3011 that is cut out so as to be recessed backward from the front end in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The insertion port 3011 is configured to communicate a space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first effect unit 3100 described later and the outside of the back box 3010 in a state assembled to the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, the insertion hole 3011 is inserted into the rotating decorative body 3210 from the side surface side of the back box 3010, so that vibration of the back second rendering unit 3200 is caused by vibration caused by transportation or the like. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be prevented from moving. Alternatively, when a problem occurs in the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 of the back second stage production unit 3200, it is possible to eliminate the problem by inserting a finger, a tool, or the like through the insertion port 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. 127A is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127B is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 128 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the back first effect unit. The back first production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened forward.

  The back first rendering unit 3100 is a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are disposed above the light guide plate 3110 and irradiate light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. The back first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which the LEDs 3121 are mounted, and the back first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 that are arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffusing lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the plurality of LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130, and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffuses the light from the LED 3131 to irradiate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. And.

  The back first stage production unit 3100 has a transparent flat plate-like upper base 3151 attached to the upper front edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 so as to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and the rear side. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent flat plate-like left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and attached to the rear side of the left base 3153 A transparent left rear cover 3154 that sandwiches the light guide plate 3110 and has the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110 And a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 It is equipped with a.

  The back first stage production unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decorative body 3161 on which the relief-like decoration is formed and the left base 3153. The back first left decorative body 3162 on which the relief-shaped decoration is formed, the back first right decorative body 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and formed with the relief-shaped decoration, The light plate 3110 is attached at the center in the left-right direction of the front lower edge, and is attached to the rear first lower decorative body 3164 on which a relief-like decoration is formed, and on the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 and forward. And a back first lower decorative board 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

  The light guide plate 3110 of the back first rendering unit 3100 has a substantially quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a cutout portion 3111 cut upward in a semicircular arc shape at the center in the left-right direction at the lower edge. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light by light irradiated from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light by light irradiated from the left surface. The first design and the second design are different from each other. Although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the light emission mode differs depending on the LED 3121 that emits light among the plurality of LEDs 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120.

  On the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 and the back first left decorative substrate 3130, the LED 3121 and the LED 3131 mounted thereon are full-color LEDs. The back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three in the vertical direction. By dividing the back first left decorative substrate 3130 into three parts, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three parts in the vertical direction so as to correspond. The first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted by causing the LED 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 to emit light, and the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted by causing the LED 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130 to emit light. The design can emit light.

  The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 include a plating layer having a metallic luster. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are formed in a band plate shape along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the light guide plate 3110. Yes.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of portions that are concentric with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110 and extend in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and the upper and lower sides are opened. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a plurality of three-sided decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 has protrusions extending radially so as to pass through the respective three-sided decorative parts. These radially extending protrusions extend outward from the three-piece decoration and extend short toward the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is obtained by providing a transparent member with a vapor-deposited layer having a predetermined metallic luster and translucency. In the state in which the back first lower decorative body 3164 does not emit the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170, the decoration on the front side can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state by the vapor deposition layer of metallic luster. .

  On the back first lower decorative board 3170, LEDs 3171 are mounted at positions behind the three-sided decorative part in the back first lower decorative body 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 are caused to emit light, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be light-decorated and the three-sided decoration part can be brightly decorated. The plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

  In the state where the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 to the substantially front surface above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the first pattern And the second pattern can be displayed in a luminous manner. In addition, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5 and, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163. However, they are located at the upper edge, the left edge, and the right edge, respectively, in the game area 5a.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 is located immediately above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. . The back first lower decoration body 3164 can decorate the outside of the rotation decoration body 3210 located at the lowest specific position among the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 136 and the like. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the back second rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear second stage production unit mainly exploded for each configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the rear second stage production unit mainly exploded for each configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 133 is a front view showing a drive mechanism in the back second effect unit. 134 (a) to (d) are explanatory views showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit, and FIGS. 135 (e) to (g) are in the back second effect unit continuing from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a some rotation decoration body. FIG. 136 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the back second effect unit.

  The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300. The back second effect unit 3200 is arranged on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of (in this case, 12) rotating ornament bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 each have a shaft portion 3210a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have translucency. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of a back second outer decorative body 3228 and a back second inner decorative body 3229 which will be described later.

  The plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are composed of a plurality (here, four) special rotation decoration bodies 3211 and the remaining (eight here) ordinary rotation decoration bodies 3212. The special rotating ornaments 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 in between. In the present embodiment, the special rotating decorative body 3211 is decorated with a three-piece decoration. The special rotating decorative body 3211 is formed in a gold color with the heel part being red and the other part having a metallic luster, and the whole has translucency. Ordinary rotating decorative body 3212 is decorated with petals. The normal rotating decorative body 3212 has a petal portion formed in a pink color having a metallic luster, and other border portions are formed in white, and the whole has translucency.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a quadrangular outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a larger diameter than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base It is rotatably attached to the front surface of 3220 and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference that is larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decoration body 3210 can rotate. And an annular drive ring 3221 having an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the plurality of axial holes 3221a and the plurality of axial holes 3221a.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220. The back second drive motor 3222 has a rotating shaft that protrudes forward through the unit base 3220. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3223 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3222 and the drive gear 3223 are meshed with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221 and can rotate to the unit base 3220. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3224 attached to the rotating base body 3210, and a rotating body gear 3225 that is fixed to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210 a of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220 b of the unit base 3220. It is equipped with.

  The back second stage production unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through-hole 3226a having a square outer shape and a slightly smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. The outer base 3226 has a circular shape that is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and is attached to the unit base 3220. The outer shape is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. The inner base 3227 having a polygonal through hole 3227a at the center and the outer base 3226 are attached to the front surface of the outer base 3226. The outer shape of the inner base 3227 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. Back second outer side having through-hole 3228a having a smaller diameter The decorative body 3228 is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 in the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the outer shape of the outer shape of the inner base 3227 is larger than the outer diameter of the inner base 3227. A back second inner decorative body 3229, and an annular back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 inserted into the through hole 3229 a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 and attached to the unit base 3220. It is equipped with.

  Furthermore, the back second stage production unit 3200 includes a rotation position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating and is located at the lowermost specific position, and a special that revolves while rotating. And a special rotation position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the lowest specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, and the rear second outer decorative body 3228 and the rear second inner decorative body 3229. And a back second decorative substrate 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted. The LED 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 is appropriately caused to emit light, whereby the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be light-decorated.

  The unit base 3220 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The drive ring 3221 has the same number of shaft holes 3221a as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding toward the center side are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The number of the protrusions in the trapezoidal shape is the same as the rotational decoration body 3210 (here, 12). In this embodiment, twelve trapezoidal protruding portions are provided by 30 degrees in the clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

  The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding from the inner periphery of the portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a toward the center. Further, the drive ring 3221 extends further to the center side from the detection pieces 3221c arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (two in this case) of the detection pieces 3221c between the plurality of detection pieces 3221c. A plurality (four in this case) of special detection pieces 3221d are provided. That is, the drive ring 3221 of the present embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotation decoration body 3210, and the same number (4) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotation decoration body 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

  The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts with a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a as a boundary, and each is attached to the unit base 3220.

  The inner base 3227 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. The inner base 3227 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts with a cross line obtained by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center by about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction, and each is attached to the unit base 3220. Yes. In this embodiment, since the divided part of the inner base 3227 divided into four parts is different from the divided part of the outer base 3226, the unit base 3220 is compared with the case where the divided parts are the same. The strength and rigidity when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to can be improved.

  The back second outer decorative body 3228 has the same outer shape as the outer base 3226 and the same size. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed such that the inner diameter of the through hole 3228a is slightly larger than the same circumference where the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The back second outer decorative body 3228 includes a red annular decorative portion 3228b provided in an annular shape with a certain width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside the annular decorative portion 3228b. And a corner decoration portion 3228c. The annular decoration portion 3228b is decorated by arranging stylized plant leaves in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated to resemble a tangled wind. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief decoration on the surface. The back second outer decorative body 3228 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four like the outer base 3226.

  The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the same circumference in which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. In the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a is substantially the same shape and the same size as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is a red decoration in which the leaves of the plant plant arranged in a certain pattern are arranged in a circumferential direction so as to form a pair with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the back second outer decorative body 3228. Is given. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface. The back second inner decorative body 3229 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four like the inner base 3227.

  The back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 has a length in the front-rear direction connecting the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light transmitting property.

  The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the back second decorative substrate 3240. The rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c located at the lowest position among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 133).

  The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227 and detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 has moved one of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding portions in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 in the clockwise direction from the lowermost portion (rotate 30 degrees). It is attached to a trapezoidal part protruding at a position (see FIG. 133).

  In the back second decorative substrate 3240, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a quadrangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240a is formed at the center. Further, the back second decorative substrate 3240 is formed with an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the outer base 3226 and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b attached to the inner base 3227. The back second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight so as to correspond to the respective divided bodies of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 which are divided into four.

  Subsequently, the movement of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the back second rendering unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second rendering unit 3200, the shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has the inner periphery of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 from the front. Through the insertion hole 3240b of the back second decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner periphery of the outer base 3226 and the outer periphery of the inner base 3227, so that the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 can rotate. While being inserted, the rear end penetrates the shaft hole 3221 a and protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221. A rotating body gear 3225 that meshes with the fixed gear section 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft section 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210.

  Among the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 move one counterclockwise from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 in a front view. The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. In the remaining eight ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212, the respective shaft portions 3210a are inserted into the remaining shaft holes in which the shaft portions 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 are not inserted.

  In the normal state, the back second rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment has four special rotation decoration bodies 3211 out of the twelve rotation decoration bodies 3210 that are in the orbit as shown in FIGS. 114 and 133. It is located at both ends in the up-down direction and both ends in the left-right direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 are located at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock and 12 o'clock in the watch, and the remaining 8 ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 are It is located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, and 11 o'clock. In the present embodiment, the position of the 6 o'clock part is set as the specific position of the rotating decorative body 3210.

  In this normal state, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (FIG. 133).

  When the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are arranged in a circle along the periphery of the game area 5a, Except for, all the rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in a good state. In the state assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear is viewed from the front through the through-hole 3229 a (back second inner periphery decoration body 3230) of the back second inner decoration body 3229. It can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the normal state, the rotating decorative body 3210 located at the specific position of the 6 o'clock position which is the lowest end is the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100. And the outside is decorated by the back first lower decorative body 3164. In addition, the rotational decoration body 3210 at a specific position is located behind the first start port 2002 and can decorate the back of the first start port 2002.

  When the drive gear 3223 is rotated clockwise by the back second drive motor 3222 in this normal state, the transmission gear 3224 meshed with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshed with the transmission gear 3224. Through this, the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

  At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, the shaft portion 3210a is moved in the circumferential direction. The rotating body gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction (here, the clockwise direction) as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. Thus, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates by one rotation when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees. .

  As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, and in a state where the normal rotating decorative body 3212 is positioned at a specific position, The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 134 (a)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation decoration body 3211 approaches a specific position, the normal rotation decoration immediately before the special rotation decoration body 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 134 (b) to (d) and FIG. 135 (e). ), See (f)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotating decorative body 3211 reaches a specific position, it corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the driving ring 3221 in which the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted. The detected piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration body 3212 immediately before the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration body 3211 is inserted. The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 135 (g)). That is, when the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 rotates the back second drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above, thereby rotating the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the above. It is also possible to revolve in the counterclockwise direction.

  Subsequently, a light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are full-color LEDs each having high luminance. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player with the emitted color regardless of the decorative colors of the rotary decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 arranged on the front side. it can. That is, the rotating decoration body 3210, the back second outer decoration body 3228, and the back second inner decoration body 3229 can be light-decorated with an appropriate color depending on the light emission color of the LED 3241.

  The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 are provided at 12 positions located behind the respective rotary decorative bodies 3210 in a state where the rotary decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state). Of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, and the rear of the corner decorative portion 3228 c of the back second outer decorative body 3228. The upper left corner LED group 3256 and the upper right corner LED group 3257 provided at the position to be positioned, the lower left corner LED group 3258 provided at the lower left corner part behind the side unit 2200, the start port unit 2100 and the side The winning prize port LED group 3259 provided in the rear part of each general winning prize port 2001 of the unit 2200 is configured. .

  The twelve rotational decoration body LED groups 3250 have the part behind the lowest specific position as the first rotational decoration body LED group 3250a, and the second rotational decoration body LED group 3250b and the third rotation in the clockwise direction. Decoration body LED group 3250c, fourth rotation decoration body LED group 3250d, fifth rotation decoration body LED group 3250e, sixth rotation decoration body LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250g, and eighth rotation decoration body LED group 3250h , A ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, a tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, an eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and a twelfth rotation decoration body LED group 3250l. In the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, the LEDs 3241 provided respectively can emit light independently.

  Each of the twelve rotational decoration body LED groups 3250 includes a radiation passing from the revolution center of the rotational decoration body 3210 through the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3210 and the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3210 with the revolution center of the rotational decoration body 3210 as the center. , A first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. Four 1st LED groups 3251, 2nd LED group 3252, 3rd LED group 3253, and 4th LED group 3254 which constitute one rotation decoration body LED group 3250 are LED3241 provided in each, It is possible to emit light independently

  The first LED group 3251 of the rotating ornament body LED group 3250 is closer to the revolution center side (inner side) than the rotation center of the rotating ornament body 3210, and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation ornament body 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) to the revolution center side with respect to the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the side (outside) opposite to the revolution center side with respect to the rotation center of the rotational decoration body 3210 with respect to the third LED group 3253.

  The twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 have, as a first intermediate LED group 3255a, a portion adjacent to the lowest specific position in the clockwise direction, the second intermediate LED group 3255b in the clockwise direction, Third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, The tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, the eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and the twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

  The back second rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 in a normal state, thereby causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be decorated with light emission. That is, 12 circular light emitting decorations arranged on the circumference can be shown to the player. At this time, it is possible to decorate the rotating decoration body 3210 with different colors or to illuminate the ordinary rotating decoration body 3212 with different colors.

  Further, by causing the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 to emit light sequentially in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotating decorative body LED group 3250 emits light, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 may emit light. Thereby, the light emission between rotation decoration body LED group 3250 will be supplemented by the light emission of intermediate LED group 3255, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that turns more smoothly.

  In addition, each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 is divided into four groups of a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. After causing the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 to emit light, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, and then adjacent to the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is caused to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that turns more smoothly and a light effect that turns in small increments. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating, if the light emission effect as described above is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotating decorative body 3210, an LED is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 itself. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is revolving while emitting light.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251,. By emitting light in a proper order, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in one rotational decoration body LED group 3250. Thereby, when the rotating decoration body 3210 is stopped in a normal state, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light in order. The player can be given an illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (spinning) in a state where it is not revolving.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 emit light, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown an emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Further, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light at the same time, an annular light emitting decoration can be shown to the player. At this time, by increasing the luminance of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the shape of the rotating decoration body 3210 or the like (hard to see). Thereby, for example, in a state in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is made difficult to be seen by increasing the luminance and light is emitted in a ring shape, the rotational decorative body 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotating decorative body 3211. After that, by making the brightness low or turning it off so that the rotating decorative body 3210 can be easily seen, it is possible to show the player that the rotating decorative body 3210 is moving sometime.

  As described above, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210, and various lights can be emitted by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240. Production can be performed. Further, by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be made less tired.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back third rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear third stage production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the rear third stage production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 141 is a front view showing a drive mechanism and a decorative board in the back third effect unit in a state where the left lateral ring ornament and the right lateral ring ornament are moved to the appearance position. The back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second rendering unit 3200.

  The back third rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a square frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. A lower unit 3330 provided in the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided in the left part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided in the right part of the front surface of the unit base 3301. And.

  The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the left-right direction, and to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. The upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the back third upper drive motor 3320 which is attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotation shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and the back third upper drive A spur gear-like drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3320, a rotation link member 3322 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3322 Slides left and right to open and close the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 That the slide link member 3323, and a.

  The upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover an upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the opening / closing position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 from the front side. The front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and the slide link member 3323 are biased in the direction in which the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is closed. An upper spring 3327.

  The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 includes a first decorative body 3312 that is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction, and a right side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3312. The second decorative body 3313 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend in a straight line from the proximal end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the chord of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 include a large-diameter decorative portion 3311a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3311b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 with the shaft hole 3312a as a center, and a shaft hole 3312a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3312b, a link piece 3312c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long hole-like link slit 3312d extending through the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. In the link slit 3312d, a transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3313 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side around the shaft hole 3313a and a shaft hole 3313a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3312 due to the engagement of the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. Accordingly, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is movable such that the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and the first LED 3316 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3311b. The second LED 3317 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

  The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotation link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third upper drive motor 3320 on the left side of the back third upper drive motor 3320. The rotary link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the drive gear 3321 and a crank pin 3322b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape forward from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323 described later.

  The slide link member 3323 has a base end side located in the vicinity of the back third upper drive motor 3320 and a tip end side of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction center (the portion where the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is rotatably supported). ) Extends to the vicinity in the left-right direction and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 extends vertically on the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3323a into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3323b slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323c detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is positioned to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322, the lower end is positioned below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322, and heads toward the front end side. So that it bends. Further, the slide link member 3323 has a flange portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always urged to the right by an upper spring 3327 hooked on the flange portion 3323d.

  In the normal state, the upper unit 3310 is such that the slide link member 3323 is positioned at the moving end to the right, and the top ends of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are farthest from each other. The decorative body 3311 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are respectively positioned near the upper edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is located at a bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a in the slide link member 3323. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3323 c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

  In this normal state, the respective leading end sides of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. A rotational moment is applied to the respective tip sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to move to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. The force which moves to the direction is acting. Due to the force to move the slide link member 3323 to the left, the force to move the crank pin 3322b to the left acts via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323.

  In a normal state, since the crank pin 3322b is located below the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotary link member 3322), the crank pin 3322b is rotated clockwise so that the crank pin 3322b moves downward and to the left. Try to revolve in the direction, but because the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b can no longer revolve in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 side acts, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not close (move to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. It is locked in the state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3322 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third upper drive motor 3320 via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotation link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the urging force of the upper spring 3327. When the slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a so that the tip side thereof moves downward via the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip. The second decorative body 3313 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3313a by the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed).

  Moreover, since the slide piece 3323 slides to the left and the detection piece 3323c also moves to the left, the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

  The crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward, and the crank pin 3322b When revolving 180 degrees or more from the state and positioned near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the driving of the back third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the top positions of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, a force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the right is applied by the biasing force of the upper spring 3327, so that the crank pin 3322 b is applied to the crank pin 3322 b via the transmission slit 3323 a of the slide link member 3323. There is a force to move it to the right. In this appearance position, the crank pin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), so that the crank pin 3322b moves counterclockwise so as to move downward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. Never do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not open (move to the standby position side) even if a force from the upper spring 3327 or the like is applied, and the state of the appearance position remains closed. And the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are positions rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 (the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313) is within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is set as above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  Thus, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

  In this embodiment, the drive gear 3321 is rotated with high torque by 2-2 phase excitation control, constant current drive control, etc. with respect to the back third upper drive motor 3320, and the upper vertical ring decoration The body 3311 can be moved (opened / closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

  The lower unit 3330 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 which is attached to be openable and closable near the center in the left-right direction at the lower part of the unit base 3301 and to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331. A lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, a back third lower drive motor 3340 which is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and a back third lower drive. A spur gear-like drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3340, a rotation link member 3342 that is rotated by rotation of the drive gear 3341 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3342 Slides left and right to open and close the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 That the slide link member 3343, and a.

  The lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the opening / closing position of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 and a part of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the front side. The front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and the slide link member 3343 are biased in the direction in which the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is closed. A lower spring 3347.

  The lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 includes a first decoration body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and a left side of the base end side of the first decoration body 3332. The second decorative body 3333 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inside of the belly of the string from the distal end. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3331a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3331b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 with the shaft hole 3332a as the center, and a shaft hole 3332a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3332b, a link piece 3332c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long-hole-like link slit 3332d extending through the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. In the link slit 3332d, a transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3333 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 around the shaft hole 3333a and a shaft hole 3333a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is movable such that the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 open and close on the proximal end side.

  The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3331b. The second LED 3337 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

  The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotation link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the right side of the back third lower drive motor 3340 at the same height as the rotation shaft of the back third lower drive motor 3340. The rotation link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. A crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343 described later.

  The slide link member 3343 has a proximal end located in the vicinity of the back third lower drive motor 3340 and a distal end supported in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is rotatably supported). ) Extends to the vicinity in the left-right direction and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 extends vertically on the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3343a into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332 and a detection piece 3343c detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342, the upper end is located above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342, and heads toward the distal end side. So that it bends. Further, the slide link member 3343 has a flange portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always urged to the left by a lower spring 3347 hooked on the flange portion 3343d.

  In the normal state, the lower unit 3330 is such that the slide link member 3343 is positioned at the leftward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are farthest apart from each other. The decorative body 3331 is in the most open standby position. In a state where the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are respectively located near the lower edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is located at a bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a in the slide link member 3343. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. A rotational moment is applied to the respective tip sides to approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3343 to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. The force which moves to the direction is acting. A force for moving the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343.

  In a normal state, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated clockwise so that the crank pin 3342b moves upward and rightward. Try to revolve in the direction, but because the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b can no longer revolve in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side is applied, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is not further opened and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the urging force of the lower spring 3347. When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 moves counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip. The second decorative body 3333 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3333a by the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3332 and the tip of the second decorative body 3333 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right together, so that the lower detection sensor 3344 is not detected.

  Then, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, and the crank pin 3342b is normal. When revolving 180 degrees or more from the state and positioned near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the driving of the back third lower drive motor 3340 is stopped. In this state, the appearance positions of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 exerts a force that moves the slide link member 3343 to the left. There is a force acting to move it to the left. In this appearance position, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the revolution center (the rotation center of the rotary link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated counterclockwise so as to move upward and to the left. However, since the crank pin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crank pin 3342b is revolved. Never do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, even if a force from the lower spring 3347 or the like is applied, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 does not open (move to the standby position side), and the state of the appearance position remains closed. And the load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 (the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is set as above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 can be opened and closed between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third lower drive motor 3340.

  In this embodiment, the drive gear 3341 is rotated with high torque by 2-2 phase excitation control or constant current drive control with respect to the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the lower vertical ring decoration The body 3331 can be moved (opened / closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The left unit 3350 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided on the left side of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the vertical direction, and on the rear side of the left side ring ornament 3351. A left side ring decorative board 3355 that is attached, a back third left drive motor 3360 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and back third A spur gear-like drive gear 3361 attached to the rotation shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotation link member 3362 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotation link member 3362 The left side ring decoration body 3351 is opened and closed by sliding up and down by rotating That the slide link member 3363, and a.

  The left unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the opening / closing position of the left side ring decoration body 3351 and a part of the left side ring decoration body 3351 from the front side. A front cover 3365, and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

  The left lateral ring decorative body 3351 includes a first decorative body 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3352. The second decorative body 3353 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and are substantially semicircular so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the string belly from the distal end. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3351a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3351b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 with the shaft hole 3352a as the center, and a shaft hole 3352a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3352b, a link piece 3352c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long hole-like link slit 3352d extending through the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. And have. In the link slit 3352d, a transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3353 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 with the shaft hole 3353a as a center, and a shaft hole 3353a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. Accordingly, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is movable such that the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are opened and closed with the base end side as the center.

  The left lateral ring decorative board 3355 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the first LED 3356 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3351a, and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3351b. The second LED 3357 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

  The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third left drive motor 3360 below the back third left drive motor 3360. The rotary link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position. A crank pin 3362b of the rotation link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363 described later.

  The slide link member 3363 has a base end side located near the back third left drive motor 3360 and a tip end side of the unit base 3301 that is supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction (the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 is rotatably supported). ) Up and down in the vertical direction and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 extends to the left and right at the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3363a into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3363b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the proximal end side.

  The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362, the right end thereof is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362, and heads toward the front end side. So that it bends.

  In the normal state, the left unit 3350 is such that the slide link member 3363 is positioned at the upward moving end, and the distal ends of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are farthest away from each other and the left lateral ring. The decoration body 3351 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively located near the left edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 approach the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is more than the rotation center. Located on the right. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the rotational moments to rotate in the clockwise direction respectively act, but the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second Since the second gear portion 3353b of the two decorative body 3353 is meshed with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the two decorative bodies 3353 is canceled and maintained in the standby position. Thereby, from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left side ring decoration A load is hardly applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

  In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 moves left in the transmission slit 3363a. Revolving so as to slide in the direction, the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decorative body 3352 moves counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3352a so that the tip side moves upward via the link slit 3352d by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip. The second decorative body 3353 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed).

  Further, since the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward together, so the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves counterclockwise, so that the crank pin 3362b slides to the left in the transmission slit 3363a and then to the right, and the crank pin 3362b When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the center of revolution), the driving of the back third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the front end of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are in an appearance position where the left side ring decorative body 3351 is closed so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In the state of the appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 are in a state of extending to the right from the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments to rotate in the clockwise direction act on the second decorative body 3353 and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3353b meshes with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portions 3353b is canceled and maintained in the state of the appearance position. Thereby, from the left side ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left side ring decoration A load is hardly applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until their respective tips come into contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 (the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353) is within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is set as above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the left unit 3350, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 can be opened and closed between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

  In this embodiment, the drive gear 3361 is rotated with high torque by the 2-2 phase excitation control or constant current drive control with respect to the back third left drive motor 3360, and the left side ring decoration The body 3351 can be moved (opened / closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

  The right unit 3370 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided on the right side of the unit base 3301 so that it can be opened and closed near the center in the vertical direction, and on the rear side of the right side ring ornament 3371. A right side ring decorative board 3375 that is attached, a back third right drive motor 3380 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and whose rotating shaft projects rearward of the unit base 3301, and back third A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382 Rotate the top and bottom to open and close the right side ring decoration 3371 That the slide link member 3383, and a.

  The right unit 3370 is attached to the front of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the opening / closing position of the right side ring decoration body 3371 and a part of the right side ring decoration body 3371 from the front side. A front cover 3385 and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

  The right lateral ring decorative body 3371 includes a first decorative body 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose proximal end extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper side on the proximal end side of the first decorative body 3372. The second decorative body 3373 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part thereof. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and then extend substantially semicircularly so that the extension line of the linear portion faces the inner side of the chord of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the chords are further formed in a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semi-arc shape with the antinodes of the strings directed in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend with a substantially constant width from the proximal end side to the distal end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have a large-diameter decorative portion 3371a having three large diameters and a small-diameter decorative portion 3371b having six small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3373 with the shaft hole 3372a as a center, and a shaft hole 3372a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c projecting from the proximal end side to the opposite side of the distal end side, and a long-hole-like link slit 3372d extending through the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. And have. In the link slit 3372d, a transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383 described later is slidably inserted.

  The second decorative body 3373 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3372 with the shaft hole 3373a as a center, and a shaft hole 3373a supported rotatably on the unit base 3301 on the base end side. And a second gear portion 3373b meshing with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. Accordingly, the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is movable such that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are opened and closed with the proximal end as the center.

  The right lateral ring decorative board 3375 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the first LED 3376 behind the large diameter decorative portion 3371a, and the rear of the small diameter decorative portion 3371b. The second LED 3377 is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED, and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

  The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380 above the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotary link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. A crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383 described later.

  The slide link member 3383 has a base end located in the vicinity of the back third right drive motor 3380 and a tip end on the center of the unit base 3301 in the up-down direction (a portion where the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 is rotatably supported). ) Up and down in the vertical direction and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided on the right side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 extends to the left and right at the base end side, and has a transmission slit 3383a into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted. It has a transmission pin 3383b slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decorative body 3372, and a detection piece 3383c detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382, the left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382, and the front end side is Bent to the opposite side.

  In the normal state, the right unit 3370 has the slide link member 3383 located at the upward movement end, and the distal ends of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are farthest from each other and the right lateral ring. The decoration body 3371 is in the most open standby position. In a state where the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each positioned near the right edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In a normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3383 c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

  In this normal state, the front end sides of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are close to the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is more than the rotation center. Located on the left. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the rotational moments that try to rotate in the counterclockwise direction respectively act, but the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and Since the 2nd gear part 3373b of the 2nd decoration body 3373 meshes | engages, the rotational moment concerning each is canceled and it maintains in the state of a standby position. Thereby, from the side of the right side ring decoration body 3371, a force to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

  When the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381 in this normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is moved rightward in the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decorative body 3372 moves in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip end side moves upward via the link slit 3372d by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip. While rotating, the second gear 3373b meshing with the first gear 3372b causes the second decorative body 3373 to rotate counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3373a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed).

  Further, since the slide piece 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward, so that the right detection sensor 3384 is not detected.

  Then, the crank pin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 revolves in the clockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3382b slides to the left after sliding in the transmission slit 3383a, and the crank pin 3382b is normally When revolving 180 degrees or more from this state and being positioned near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (leftward of the revolution center), the driving of the back third right drive motor 3380 is stopped. In this state, the front positions of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are close to each other so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In the state of the appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are in a state of extending leftward from the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments to rotate counterclockwise act on the second decorative body 3373 and the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3373b meshes with each other, the rotational moment applied to each of the second gear portions 3373b is canceled and maintained in the appearance position state. Thereby, from the right side ring decoration body 3371 side, almost no force is exerted to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are not rotated until their respective tips are in contact with each other, and are each rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the right side ring decoration body 3371 (the first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in the position. When the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is set as above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the right unit 3370, the back third ring drive motor 3380 can open and close the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state.

  In this embodiment, the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque by 2-2 phase excitation control or constant current drive control with respect to the back third right drive motor 3380, and the right side ring decoration The body 3371 can be moved (opened / closed) between the standby position and the appearance position in a very short time of 650 ms.

  In the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the back third rendering unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are also provided behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331.

  Next, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 in the back third rendering unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, each of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is in a standby position. ing. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are in the standby position, the back side of the back second effect unit 3200 arranged in the front side. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229 and is invisible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, The front end of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and a decoration in which three rings are arranged vertically (up and down). It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 144).

  Further, when the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in a normal state, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. The front end of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are arranged side by side (left and right). Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 145).

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. When the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are respectively moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3331 is located at the center in the frame of the unit base 3301 in a front view. The front end of the ring decorative body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are close to each other, and the front end of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the front end of the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are close to each other. The player can see the decoration in which the rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross (see FIG. 146).

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven in a normal state, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven. Is moved from the standby position to the midway position from the appearance position to the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 (first The front end portions of the decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) are located inside the through-hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in a front view, and are partly on the player side (See FIG. 147). In this state, the two leading ends of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229, and two right side ring decoration bodies 3371 Since two tips appear in the upper and lower corners on the right side among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be changed. it can.

  As described above, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are appropriately combined. By moving to the appearance position, ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or in a cross can appear, and various movable effects can be shown to the player.

  Also, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355, the right horizontal ring. The first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375 are appropriately illuminated to emit light on the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371. Therefore, various light emission effects can be shown to the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 142 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. FIG. 143 is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotating ornament in the back second effect unit is moved to a specific position. FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring ornament and the lower vertical ring ornament in the back third effect unit in a state where they are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body in the back third effect unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decorative body, the lower vertical ring decorative body, the left horizontal ring decorative body, and the right horizontal ring decorative body moved to the appearance position in the back third stage production unit. is there. FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position.

  FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back third effect unit. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board showing an example of the shadow effect executed during the light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 150 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the game board facing the game window of the door frame.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, an attacker unit 2400, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since it is formed transparently, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 are passed through them. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, the back first right decorative body 3163, the back first lower decorative body 3164, and the plurality of rotations in the back second directive unit 3200 Decoration body 3210 (special rotation decoration body 3211 and normal rotation decoration body 3212), back second outer decoration body 3228, back second inside Decorative body 3229, and a back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognize the.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, four special rotation decoration bodies 3211 out of the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210 in the back second stage production unit 3200 have both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution track. , Located at both ends in the left-right direction. That is, one special rotating decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position (6 o'clock part of the timepiece) that is the lowest on the revolution track. The special rotating decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is positioned at the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outside is the back first lower decorative body 3164. It is in a state decorated by. Moreover, the special rotation decoration body 3211 (rotation decoration body 3210) of a specific position is located behind the 1st starting port 2002, and has decorated the back of the 1st starting port 2002 (refer FIG. 143).

  In the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are respectively in the standby position state. It is located outside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in the back second rendering unit 3200 in the front view, so that the front is a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, a drive ring 3221, and the back second outer side. It is covered with a decorative body 3228, a back second inner decorative body 3229, etc., and is invisible from the player side.

  In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side through the inside of the back second inner decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 is displayed on the player side (front). Can be visually recognized in a good state.

  The game board 5 has the back first of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  First, an effect using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 142, FIG. 143, and the like. As an effect using the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 142, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the back second drive motor 3222. A movable effect of revolving in the clockwise direction can be performed while the plurality (12) of the rotating decoration bodies 3210 rotate in the clockwise direction. As a result, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve around the effect image that can be seen through the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 while rotating. It is possible to make 5a lively and entertain the player.

  As described above, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative board 3170 in the back first effect unit 3100 is caused to emit light while the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, the rear side is the rotating decoration body. Since the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 around which 3210 circulates, the player's interest can be directed to the back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, a desired rotational decorative body 3210 (special rotational decorative body 3211) is placed in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164 with respect to the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, only the first rotation decoration body LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position in the rotation decoration body LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decorative body 3210 passing through the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 in the ring can be viewed well, and the other rotating decorative body 3210 is difficult to view. It is possible to show the player an effect like a roulette or slot with the inside of the ring as a window, and to enhance the throbbing feeling as to whether or not the desired rotating ornament 3210 stops at a specific position. Can do.

  Then, when the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) stops within the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting port 2002 is provided, if the player receives the game ball B at the first starting port 2002, the player may think that there is a very high possibility that a “hit” will be drawn. It is possible to urge the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first start port 2002 and to entertain the game ball B.

  Further, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while being rotated by the driving of the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are appropriately set in accordance with the movement position of each rotating decorative body 3210. You may make it light-emit. For example, when one rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are displayed. While turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the first LED group 3251 and the first LED group 3251 are turned on. The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Further, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off, the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is turned off, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Leave it alone.

  Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the first position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are turned on, and the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group are turned on. While 3254 is kept off, the intermediate LED group 3255 is kept on. Then, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the first position (the next rotating decorative body 3210 is positioned at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to rotate the rotating decorative body LED. The group 3250 is turned on and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. As a result, the LED 3241 in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is positioned in front is turned on, and the LED 3241 in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is not positioned in front is turned off. As if the LED is provided in itself, the rotation decoration body 3210 can be shown to the player as if revolving while emitting light, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. .

  Further, in the back second rendering unit 3200, in a normal state, all the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high luminance, and then a plurality of rotational decorations are driven by the back second drive motor 3222. The body 3210 rotates and revolves, the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped in a state different from the normal state, and the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. May be. Thereby, since all the rotary decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high luminance, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210. By changing the position of 3210, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, in the back second rendering unit 3200, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative board 3240 can appropriately emit light, so that the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is changed from the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. , Second rotation decoration body LED group 3250b, third rotation decoration body LED group 3250c, fourth rotation decoration body LED group 3250d, fifth rotation decoration body LED group 3250e, sixth rotation decoration body LED group 3250f, seventh rotation decoration Body LED group 3250g, eighth rotation decoration body LED group 3250h, ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and twelve rotation decoration body LED group By emitting light (lighting) in order, such as 3250l, the player can have a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in a predetermined direction. So it can be, it is possible to entertain the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the player's expectation can be enhanced depending on at which position the rotation of the light stops, and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, when stopping rotation of light, the rotation speed of light is gradually reduced, and in the decorative LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group. The LED group 3254 and then the intermediate LED group 3255 may be lit in order so that the light moves in small increments in the rotation direction and stops slowly. Thereby, since the position where light stops becomes fine, it can be made difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of light stops, and the player can be excited and entertained.

  In addition, as described above, since the light can be rotated (turned around), by turning on and off in order in the circumferential direction, the lighting effect that measures time like a clock and the remaining time can be reduced. The suggested light-emitting effect can also be performed, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251,. The light may be emitted in any order. Thereby, while it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which light is rotating in one rotation decoration body LED group 3250, the rotation decoration body 3210 is not revolving with respect to the player. An illusion of rotating (spinning) can be provided, and the player can be entertained.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 emit light, and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light, the outer side from the center It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown an emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Next, effects using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, as shown in FIG. 144, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are moved. Move from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the front end of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are brought close to each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 when viewed from the front. You can show the player the decorations that are lined up and down.

  Further, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 145, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state to decorate the left lateral ring. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front end of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 come close to each other at the center inside the back second inner periphery decoration body 3230 in front view, and the three rings are lateral ( You can show the player the decorations arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 of the back third stage production unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position, and the decoration is formed in a state where three rings are arranged side by side. In the display device 1600, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed in the respective parts of the three rings. It is possible to display the variation of the three symbol sequences for suggestion. Thereby, in the state where the left side ring ornament 3351 and the right side ring ornament 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the top and bottom of the three symbol rows are compared with the case where the three symbol rows are variably displayed. Since the game is physically decorated by the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 at the appearance position, the symbol sequence that is variably displayed to the player is a game such as “big hit” It is possible to make it seem that there is a high possibility that the player will be stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, and the player's sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 146, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, And the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively. Move. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 are brought close to each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral ornament 3230 and the left horizontal ring ornament 3351 The front end and the front end of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, and the decoration in which five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross can be shown to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 146, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player, such as “big hit”, may occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the “big hit” game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. May be. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 are moved to the appearance position in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 may be moved to the appearance position in this order. As a result, since the five rings are arranged in a cross shape through multiple stages, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not to move to the next stage at each stage. Can entertain.

  By the way, in the back third rendering unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are controlled by 2-2 phase excitation. Since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are driven at a high torque by constant current drive control or the like, it is less than 1 second. It is possible to move from the standby position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the standby position in a very short time (here, 650 ms). As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, giving a strong impact to the player. Can entertain the player.

  Furthermore, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 147, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is driven. And the right side ring decoration body 3371 is moved to a position on the way from the standby position to the appearance position. Thereby, the tip part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the tip part of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 (first decoration body 3372 and second decoration body 3373) However, it is located inside the back 2nd inner periphery decoration body 3230 in front view, and can be visually recognized partially from the player side.

  Specifically, in the state of FIG. 147, the two leading ends of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, The two front ends of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 appear at the upper and lower corners on the right side among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. Thereby, since the inner shape of the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 on which the display screen of the effect display device 1600 faces is changed, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body are provided to the player. The movement of 3371 can be easily noticed, and the player can feel that something will happen and can increase the expectation of the game.

  When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, only the tip portion can be visually recognized. Thus, it may be moved halfway and moved to the appearance position as the next stage. Thus, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the player has completely moved to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small increments with respect to the standby position, and the player changes the shape inside the back second inner periphery decorative body 3230 in small increments. Can be made easier to notice.

  In the back third rendering unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the first LED of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355. The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration board 3375 are appropriately illuminated, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that have moved to the appearance position side can be decorated with light emission in various light emission modes. , Can entertain the player.

  By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third stage production unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Sometimes, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 includes the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the part directly behind the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. A decorative image 3390 similar to that shown in Fig. 148 is displayed (see Fig. 148).

  In the present embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the back third rendering unit 3300 is provided. When it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position, even if an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is executed. These are kept at the standby position so as not to move to the appearance position, and the effect display device 1600 displays the decoration image 3390 (see FIG. 148). Thereby, even if a problem occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, the decoration image 3390 can be seen, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the problem. By recognizing, it is possible to prevent the player from having to interrupt the game and feel uncomfortable, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back unit 3000, it is also possible to perform an effect in which an effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and an effect by the back third effect unit 3300 are appropriately combined. As a result, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player more stages of production, the player can be thrilled and thrilled at each stage, which can increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when an appropriate light emission effect is executed using the back first effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300, While turning off the LEDs located on the line, it is possible to perform a shadow effect in which the line is moved from one side of the predetermined direction to the other side in a short time (one second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a. (See FIG. 149). Thus, by turning off the LEDs on a specific line, a dark portion (shadow part 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player “ha” and to concentrate on the game with a premonition that something will happen. Note that the shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the diagonal direction.

  In addition, the above shadow effect is a movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3210, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, etc. It can also be executed when the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is switched. Thus, with the shadow effect as a break, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movable effect, effect image, etc., and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the gaming area 5a can be viewed from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101 a is arranged in a semi-tubular dish upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decoration. It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decorative body 453. Further, in the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312 a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 are provided. Back, dish upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left Since the decoration board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting the LEDs on the decoration board. The light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  And as above-mentioned, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, since various light emission effects can be performed, for example, the 1st LED group 3251 and the 3rd LED group 3253 of the back 2nd effect unit 3200, the 2nd When the LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 and the LEDs on the decorative boards of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in this order, the player can show a light-emitting effect that spreads from the center to the outside. Can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Or if it makes it light-emit in order of LED of each decoration board of door frame 3, 2nd LED group 3252 and 4th LED group 3254, 1st LED group 3251, and 3rd LED group 3253 of back 2nd production unit 3200, The player can show the player a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center, and the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, on the door frame 3 side in the light emission effect in which light rotates (turns) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255. Alternatively, a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a may be executed. This makes it possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the entire pachinko machine 1 turns around the center of the game area 5a, giving a strong impact to the player, and making the player enjoy It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light-emitting effect as described above can be combined as appropriate, and also combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and to make the player hard to get tired. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning mouth 2001, a general winning mouth sensor 3001, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a gaming ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, and a big winning mouth 2005 Detection signals from the big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received by the player and the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input via the main control I / O port, respectively. The

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. From the main control I / O port, the status indicator of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol indicator, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, A drive signal is output to the second special holding number display, the round display, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the big prize port sensor 2403 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 use contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 is played. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 are mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 151, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second stage production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and a left lateral ring decoration of the back third stage production unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotation position, movement position, and the like of the body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 1720 of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serials different from the display command. This is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect drive board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or receives the gaming board side lighting / flashing command. Based on the lighting signal or the flashing signal, the game board 5 is output to the LED of each decorative board.

  In addition, the effect drive board 1720 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3 and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. Etc.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 117 thru | or 119 grade | etc.,. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5 a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp inlet 2501. .

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest part (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510), While coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first probability is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2501, it is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit There is a possibility that it will be received in the general winning opening 2001 of 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 or the like. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. Section 2511), it is discharged above the gate part 2003 of the center accessory 2500 through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the portion 2003, the gate portion 2003 passes with a certain probability.

  The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first distribution passage 2521 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance that is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. The second distribution passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the first circulation passage 2521 and enters the upstream space 2511 and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right hit), the player enters the second distribution passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, and the gate portion 2003 is not much moved. It passes through the right side of the gate part 2003 without passing through. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is guided to the left from the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, and is high. Pass through the gate part 2003 with probability.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the attacker unit 2400 The closed second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 or the sub function display unit 2450 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate unit 2003 is positioned at the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 with a very high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. Enter the attacker right passage 2422. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate part 2003 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the gate part 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to the left of the attacker right passage 2422 with a very high probability, and enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability.

  Note that a general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422. When the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 and detected by the general winning port sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and enters the second start port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability. It distributes on the second start door 2411. When the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 does not enter the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B enters the attacker lower right passage 2426 and is related to the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005. Without being discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the closed second start opening door 2411.

  When the game ball B enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “normal hit”, and the second start opening door 2411 is When in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B that has entered the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and has not been received by the second start opening 2004 is discharged to the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 side and rolled on the closed big winning opening door 2413. Later, it is discharged into the game area 5a and discharged out of the game area 5a through the out port 1008. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and the special winning opening guide shelf 2424, and the intermediate passage 2427 is open. The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the winning prize exit guidance shelf 2424 side enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being related to the big prize winning port 2005.

  Because of the above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 so much, so that the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B. The normal lottery result is not often drawn, and the game ball B is not received much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game balls B that have circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 pass through the gate part 2003 with a high probability, the normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate part 2003 of the game balls B ( “Normal hit”) is highly likely to be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received at the second starting port 2004.

  For this reason, since the player performs a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511. In addition, the driving strength of the gaming ball B must be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the gaming ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by giving a change to the operation of driving the game ball B, and to make the player enter the operation of the game ball B to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit” ”,“ Medium hit ”,“ Small win ”,“ Per probability fluctuation (probability change) ”,“ Per time reduction (shorter time) ”, and lottery of the lottery result. This is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The lottery results include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “per time (shortening time)” , “Short-range wins”, “ Strange shorter working hours per absent "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variation time has elapsed, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005. An open / close pattern that closes the game ball B in an unacceptable state when one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, the special winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be received in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (special time) as the advantageous gaming state. ). This ST is to maintain a certain change or short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  As described above, when the special winning lot 2005 is opened by the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the second distribution passage When the game ball B is operated to aim at the entrance of 2522, the operation of the game ball must be finely adjusted. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest in games will be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the first Since the game ball B can be distributed to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (the big winning opening 2005 side) through the two start opening guiding shelves 2423, it is easy even without adjusting the delicate driving operation. The game ball B can be received into the big prize opening 2005 by the driving operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state, and the driving operation of the game ball B according to the gaming state is sharp. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). And the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 are set to have a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. , And the back third stage production unit 3300, etc. can be used as appropriate to produce a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, reducing the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the back first of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. Using the effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, the back third effect unit 3300, etc. as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. It can be entertained and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The back second drive motor 3222 of the back second rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 in this embodiment is a drive motor of the present invention, and the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 in this embodiment are books. In the decorative body of the present invention, the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the present embodiment is the decorative body through hole of the present invention, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 in the present embodiment is the stop position detection sensor of the present invention, The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 in the present embodiment is a special position detection sensor of the present invention, the LED 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 in the present embodiment is a light emitting means of the present invention, and the rotary decoration body LED group 3250 in the present embodiment. Are the decorative body light emitting means group of the present invention, and the intermediate LED group 3255 in this embodiment is the intermediate light emitting means group of the present invention. Corresponding to that.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second stage production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through-hole 3329a penetrating in the front-rear direction. In front of the back second inner decorative body 3229, in the normal state, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 that are specially decorated and different from the special rotating decorative body 3211 are provided. The twelve rotating decorative bodies 3210 having a flat plate shape and composed of the remaining six ordinary rotating decorative bodies 3212 are centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided rearward from the through hole 3229a is faced. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotary decorative body 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. The rotating decorative body 3210 and the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a together with the shaft portion 3210a are on the circumference having a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a (revolving circle) Move (revolve). At this time, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided closer to the revolution center than the revolution circle in the unit base 3220. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolving direction of the rotating body gear 3225. Together with the shaft portion 3210a, it rotates (rotates) around the shaft extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the back second drive motor 3222, a plurality (12 pieces) of the rotary decoration body 3210 revolves in the same direction while rotating, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It can attract the player's interest strongly and can make the player think that there is something good, and raises the expectation of the game and suppresses the decline in interest Can be made.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while revolving around the axis extending in the front-rear direction have a flat plate shape, the surface of the rotating decorative body 3210 is directed forward, and the entire rotating decorative body 3210 is a player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decoration bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, it is possible to show the player how the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 rotate with each other. It can be shown to the player, and the player can have a strong impact and can be greatly enjoyed, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210 (one stop position (one A plurality of (12) rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 divided behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 that have stopped revolving at a specific position (positions where the rotation decoration body 3210 stops revolving); Since the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 configured by the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 are provided, the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped positions. When the LED 3241 of the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 is caused to emit light in the state, the rotational decoration body 3210 can be illuminated, and the plurality of rotational decoration bodies 3210 are stopped. In state between each other, when the emit LED3241 intermediate LED group 3255 can emit light decoration rotational decorative body 3210. Therefore, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the LED 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are appropriately caused to emit light according to the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, light is emitted. Since the LED 3241 is moved together with the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having the translucency of the light from the LED 3241 are rotated and decorated. By irradiating forward (player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated such that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decoration body 3210. By showing the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 rotates and revolves, the player is greatly enjoyed. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolving direction of the rotational decoration body 3210 with the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group. Since the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 can be finely lit according to the revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210, only the LED 3241 located behind the rotational decorative body 3210 is divided. If the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating, the player can have a strong illusion and the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 that is decorated with light emission can be made. It can be more entertaining, and it can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. .

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 including the rotation decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotation decoration body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. When all the LEDs 3241 except for the LED 3241 included in the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the prize opening LED group 3259 are caused to emit light, an annular light emitting effect is shown to the player. be able to. In addition, since the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolving direction (circumferential direction) of the rotational decoration body 3210, the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are circumferentially connected. When the light is emitted alternately in the direction, the player can be shown a light emitting decoration in which light rotates on the circumference. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By emitting light sequentially from the outside to the outside, the player can show a light-emitting effect in which the light circle spreads outward, or by causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light sequentially from the outside of the ring to the inside. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges inward. As described above, since various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when performing a light-emitting effect in which light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotation decoration body 3210, each rotation decoration body LED group 3250 has the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 in the rotation direction of the rotation decoration body 3210. Since the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are divided, the movement of light in the revolving direction can be made finer. Can show. In addition, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, and it is difficult to get tired of the player by various lighting effects. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect of revolving while rotating the rotating decorative body 3210, an effect that could not be seen in a conventional pachinko machine is played by the player. The player can have a strong impact on the player, can attract the player's interest strongly, can entertain the player, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into the plurality of rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each of the rotation decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 is controlled to emit light. As a result, the load on the control can be reduced as compared with the case where the plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled to emit light one by one. Can be avoided, and the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotational decoration body 3210, for example, only the rotational decoration body LED group 3250 is provided at regular time intervals. The speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction is different between the case where light is emitted sequentially in the circumferential direction and the case where the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately emitted in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emission effect, and to allow the player to enjoy the light emission effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, and to suppress the lowering of the player's interest it can.

  Further, since the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decorative body 3228 is provided. Since the LED 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 is difficult to visually recognize from the front by the back second inner decorative body 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the illusion that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210, and it is possible to further increase the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating. The effect by the decoration body 3210 can be more enjoyed, and the lowering of interest in the player's game is suppressed. Door can be.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have special rotating decorative bodies 3211 provided with a special decoration (three-sided decoration), the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are caused to revolve while rotating. The special rotation decoration body 3211 can make the player throbbing depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped at a specific position, and the player can entertain the movable effect by the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that one rotational decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolution circumference including the stop position, and one special rotational decoration body 3211 are located at the specific position. And a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotational rotational body 3212 of the plurality of rotational decorative bodies 3210 is located at a specific position, only the rotational position detection sensor 3231 is provided. When the special rotation decorative body 3211 is located at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect the rotation, and the detection by the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation are detected. Depending on the combination of detection by the position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotation decoration body 3212 or the special rotation decoration body 3211 is placed at a specific position. Les it is possible to detect whether located. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is caused to stop revolving at a specific position, the rotation detecting sensor 3231 and the special rotating position detecting sensor 3232 are used so that the normal rotating decorative body revolving while rotating. 3212 and the special rotating decorative body 3211 can be revolved and stopped at a specific position, so that it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decorative body 3211 stops revolving at the specific position. The player can be excited and entertained, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotation decoration body 3212 and the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position. 3221d is provided in the drive ring 3221, so that the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece or the special detection piece is provided in the rotating decorative body 3210. The configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be revolved while rotating by one back second drive motor 3222, the rotation and revolution of the rotating decorative body 3210 are driven by separate drive motors. In comparison, the structure of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be simplified, the driving mechanism can be reduced, and control of the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be controlled. The load can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the driving mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced, a space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be relatively widened. The rotary decoration body 3210 can be made larger to make it stand out from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210.

  Further, since the shaft portion 3210a protrudes rearward from the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is behind the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also behind the LED 3241. The rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221 and the like do not block the light emitted forward from the LED 3241, and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 can be surely decorated with light emission.

  Further, a back second drive motor 3222 for rotating the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, and the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220 b (inside of the through hole 3229 a) can be widened, so that it faces the inside. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

  In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220b and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the back side of the drive ring 3221 is positioned substantially at the same position as the front-rear direction. Since the two-drive motor 3222 can be provided, an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210 can be suppressed. Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are formed in a flat plate shape, and the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced. From these things, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the diameter of the rotating decorative body 3210 can be made larger by relatively widening the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. It is possible to make the player stand out from the player side, attract the player's interest strongly to the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210, and provide other members in front of and behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210. Thus, by using the other members provided to produce the effects, it is possible to show the player more various effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512) causes the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3000 in the back unit 3000 to be changed. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 of the right unit 3370 are not visible from the player side. Therefore, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well, and the player can entertain the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 performs an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position, The number of upper vertical ring decoration bodies 3311, lower vertical ring decoration bodies 3331, left horizontal ring decoration bodies 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration bodies 3371 appear on the effect display device 1600 at the timing of moving from the retracted position to the appearance position. A decorative image 3390 is displayed at a position behind the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 at the position, and the frame-shaped upper vertical ring decorative body 3331 is displayed. Ring ornament body 3311, lower longitudinal ring ornament body 3331, left lateral ring ornament body 3351, and right lateral ring ornament body 3371 Since a specific effect image (for example, a plurality of symbol strings for suggesting a lottery special lottery result) is displayed in the divided area, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal The specific effect image is clearly demarcated by the ring decorative body 3351 and the right side ring decorative body 3371, the specific effect image can be made conspicuous, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. .

  Then, for some reason, any one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 causes all the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, the lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, and the left horizontal ring to be detected. Since only the movement control of the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is paused, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical The ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move from the retracted position, and the effect display device 1600 displays the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 at the appearance position. , A decorative image 3390 is displayed at the rear part of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring of the appearance position are displayed. Since the specific effect image is displayed at a part defined by the decorative body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 (decorative image 3390), the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are displayed for the player. , The left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 can be given an illusion as if they moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring by the decorative image 3390 similar to the vertical decorative ring 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. The player can show the same effects as the effects by the decorative body 3351 and the right side ring decorative body 3371. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 fail to move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3331 A decorative image 3390 similar to the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring An effect equivalent to the effect by the decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player by the decorative image 3390, and the specific effect image can be made conspicuous by the decorative image 3390. It is possible to make the player enjoy the effect by the specific effect image and suppress the decrease in the interest.

  In addition, when any one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, The movement control of all the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311, the lower vertical ring ornaments 3331, the left horizontal ring ornaments 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornaments 3371 is suspended, and the upper vertical ring ornaments 3311 and the lower vertical ring ornaments. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and When performing the effect of moving the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position at the same time, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 moved to the appearance position, An effect in which any one of the ring decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 and the decorative image 3390 that can be visually recognized by not moving to the appearance position due to a malfunction is performed. Can be avoided, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, a decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decorative image is displayed regardless of whether or not the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not moved to the appearance position. Since 3390 is displayed, an image for when a problem occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is separately provided. This is unnecessary, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, an upper detection sensor 3324, a lower detection sensor 3344, a left detection sensor 3364, and a right detection sensor 3384, When the malfunction that the right lateral ring ornament 3371 does not move is detected, the movement control of the upper longitudinal ring ornament 3311, the lower longitudinal ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 is suspended. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped at a halfway position due to a malfunction. To prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since only the movement control is suspended and the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the decoration image 3390, and the decrease in the player's interest is suppressed. be able to.

  Further, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is stopped by detecting a failure, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3371 is stopped. Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 No overload acts on the motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, It is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged, and it is possible to avoid the problem from expanding.

  Further, since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are invisible in the state of the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration body for some reason. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are decorated on the effect display device 1600 as described above even if there is a problem that the movement cannot be made to the appearance position. Since the image 3390 is displayed, the effect of the decoration image 3390 can be enjoyed, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retracted position can be enjoyed. Since the body 3371 is not visible, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice that the player does not move, preventing the player from feeling uneasy and suppressing a decrease in interest Can be made.

  Further, when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the retracted position (normal state), the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is displayed to the player in the retracted position. Since the presence of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal ring ornament 3351, and the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 can be made difficult to notice, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left horizontal When the ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical phosphorus that were not visible are displayed. The appearance of the decoration body 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and provide something for the player. It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Further, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body are obtained by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384. 3371 does not move to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 at the retreat position are Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are used for detection, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring. The decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position. The upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal sensor. If the ring decorative body 3371 is still detected, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are not moved, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3371 is not moved. The ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 can be detected not to move to the appearance position, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be realized. Can be

  A decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 includes an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and a lower vertical ring decorative body. The size may be larger or smaller than the size of 3331, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. When the decorative image 3390 is larger than the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the decorative image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has an advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decoration image 3390 is smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, When an effect of moving the ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, left There is an advantage that the decorative image 3390 is not recognized by the player unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is stopped.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is a gate as a privilege granting section provided in the game area 5a. When the player passes the part 2003 or is accepted into the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a privilege granting unit, a predetermined lottery (for example, a normal lottery that is advantageous to the player) A lottery of a result or a special lottery result, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are given, and the player is made to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at a privilege granting part such as the gate part 2003 You can play games.

  In the game area 5a, an upstream space 2511 is provided above the right upper right and right peripheral wall 2510 above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and on the downstream side of the upstream space 2511. Since the game balls B are distributed through different routes depending on the driving strength and the distribution passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate portion 2003 is provided, the first distribution constituting the distribution passage group 2520 is provided. The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 on the downstream side differs for each of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, the game ball B is placed at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 where the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 and has a high probability that the game ball B will pass through the gate portion 2003. The driving strength of the gaming ball B must be adjusted so that the gaming ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength at which the player enters the game ball B. It is possible to give changes, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to allow the player to enter the game ball B for the desired entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  In addition, a stop portion 1006 protrudes inward from the periphery of the game area 5a in the vicinity of the right end of the upstream space portion 2511, and an inlet of the first flow passage 2521 is provided in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (for example, a specific or higher driving strength at which the game ball B circulates (rolls) along the periphery of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the stop portion 1006 enters the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 in the flow passage group 2520 with a high probability. Accordingly, when aiming at the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts against the stopper portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second circulation passage 2522, the strength does not abut against the stopper portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven in, the game ball B can be driven in sharply, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  And the chance that the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 provided with an entrance in the vicinity of the stop 1006 has a low probability of passing through the downstream gate portion 2003, and the privilege is given. The game ball 5 is discharged out of the game area 5a without causing the player to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Thus, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B, to make the player hard to get tired, and to aim at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522 to the player. The driving operation of the ball B can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is driven, the distribution passage group 2520 (the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage) that distribute through different routes according to the driving strength of the game ball B. The circulation passage 2522) can be reliably realized, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522, It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a with the driving strength to enter the space portion 2511 and with the driving strength to enter the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. Yes, it is possible to further increase the difficulty level of the game ball B driving operation, and to make the player enjoy the game ball B driving operation and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the entrances thereof are adjacent to each other. Therefore, the game ball B is caused by a slight difference in the driving strength of the game ball B. Because the entrance of the distribution passage through which the player enters is easy to be different, it is possible to increase the difficulty of the player to drive the game ball B, and to entertain the player to drive the game ball B, and to reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are aggregated to some extent. The inside of the frame of the accessory 2500 can be made relatively wide, and the player can enjoy the game within the game area 5a and the effect within the frame of the center accessory 2500, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the distribution passage group 2520 is configured by the two distribution passages of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by two distribution passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second start-port guidance shelf 2423 with a high probability by contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker right lower passage 2426 with high probability.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back second stage production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 has been shown to revolve in the same direction as the direction in which the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be revolving in the opposite direction to the direction of rotation.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1600 Production display device 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3200 Back second production unit 3210 Rotating decoration body 3210a Axis Portion 3211 Special rotating ornament 3212 Normal rotating ornament 3220 Unit base 3220a Through hole 3220b Fixed gear portion 3221 Drive ring 3221a Shaft hole 3221b Ring gear portion 3221c Detection piece 3221d Special detection piece 3222 Back second drive motor (drive motor)
3223 Drive gear 3224 Transmission gear 3225 Rotating body gear 3228 Back second outer decorative body (decorative body)
3228a Through hole 3229 Back second inner decorative body (decorative body)
3229a Through hole (decorative body through hole)
3231 Rotation position detection sensor (stop position detection sensor)
3232 Special rotational position detection sensor (Special position detection sensor)
3240 Back second decorative board 3241 LED (light emitting means)
3250 Rotating decorative body LED group (Decorative body light emitting means group)
3255 Intermediate LED group (Intermediate light emitting means group)

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating decorative bodies having translucency that revolve around an axis extending forward and backward while rotating;
A plurality of light emitting means arranged behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies and within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body and capable of irradiating light forward are provided. Gaming machine.

Images